Canon PowerShot SX710 HS Handleiding
- Categorie
- Lcd-tv's
- Type
- Handleiding
1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Camera User Guide
© CANON INC. 2015 CDD-E637-010
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
13) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-6LH*
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Wrist Strap
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Up button (12) on back
[ ] Left button (8) on back
[ ] Right button (13) on back
[ ] Down button (15) on back
[ ] Control dial (7) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Part Names
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
) (
5
) (
6
)(
7
) (
8
) (
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
17
)(
13
)
(
16
)
(
12
)
(1) Microphone
(2) Lamp
(3) Lens
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Movie button
(6) Shutter button
(7) Power button
(8) Wi-Fi antenna area
(9) Flash
(10)
(N-Mark)*
(11) [
(Flash pop up)] switch
(12) [
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
button
(13) Serial number (Body number)
(14) Tripod socket
(15) DC coupler terminal cover
(16) Memory card/battery cover
(17) Strap mount
* Used with NFC features (
=
107).
(
1
) (
2
) (
3
) (
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
16
)
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)
(2) Speaker
(3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMI
TM
terminal
(5) Mode dial
(6) [
(Playback)] button
(7) Control dial
(8) [
(Macro)] /
[
(Manual focus)] / Left button
(9) Indicator
(10) [
(Display)] button
(11) [
(Mobile Device Connection)]
button
(12) [
(Exposure compensation)] /
[
(Wi-Fi)] / Up button
(13) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(14) FUNC. (Function) / SET button
(15) [
(Self-timer)] / [ (Story
Highlights)] / Down button
(16) [
] button
● Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................24
On/Off ..................................................................................... 24
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 25
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................25
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 25
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 25
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 26
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 26
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 27
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 28
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 29
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 30
Clock ...................................................................................... 30
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ......................................31
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 31
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................31
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 33
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................34
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................34
Still Images ............................................................................ 34
Movies ...................................................................................34
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 35
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................36
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................36
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................37
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 37
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 37
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Seek) ............................................................38
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information ..............................................................2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations .................................................11
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 13
Basic Guide
Basic Operations.............................................................16
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 16
Holding the Camera ...................................................................16
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................17
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................17
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................18
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 19
Changing the Date and Time .................................................19
Display Language ...................................................................... 20
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 21
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................21
Viewing ......................................................................................22
Erasing Images .....................................................................23
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 52
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................52
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......53
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 53
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................53
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................54
Other Shooting Modes ....................................................55
Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control) ............ 55
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Shot) ....................................................................... 56
Choosing Effects .......................................................................56
Moving Subjects (Sports) ....................................................... 57
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 57
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 59
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 59
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............60
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................60
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........61
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................61
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................62
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 62
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 62
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile) .........................62
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) ..........63
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer) ...................................................................63
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 64
Recording Movies in Standard Mode ........................................64
Recording Movies with Smoother Motion .............................. 64
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording .... 65
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement
(Auto Zoom) ...............................................................................39
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ............................40
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist) ..............................................................................40
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 41
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................41
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................42
Continuous Shooting .................................................................42
Image Display during Playback .............................................43
Using Face ID......................................................................... 43
Personal Information .................................................................43
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 44
Shooting ....................................................................................45
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................46
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................46
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 47
Image Customization Features .............................................. 48
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 48
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) .......... 48
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on
Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) ..................................................48
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........49
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................49
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 50
Displaying Grid Lines .................................................................50
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................50
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................51
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 51
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................51
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording ................................................................... 52
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Flash....................................................................................... 77
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................77
Auto .......................................................................................77
On ..........................................................................................77
Slow Synchro ........................................................................78
Off .......................................................................................... 78
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................78
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 79
Other Settings ........................................................................ 79
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 79
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 79
Tv, Av, and M Mode .........................................................80
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 80
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 81
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 81
Adjusting the Flash Output ........................................................82
Playback Mode ................................................................ 83
Viewing ................................................................................... 83
Switching Display Modes ...........................................................84
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ......................85
Histogram ..............................................................................85
GPS Information Display .......................................................85
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................85
Viewing by Date .....................................................................86
Checking People Detected in Face ID .......................................86
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 86
Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 86
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .........................87
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .......................................87
Correcting Severe Camera Shake ........................................65
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode .......................................65
Playback Effects ....................................................................66
Recording iFrame Movies ..........................................................66
P Mode .............................................................................67
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 67
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 68
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 68
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................68
Changing the Metering Method .................................................68
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................69
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 69
Image Colors .......................................................................... 70
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................70
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 70
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................70
Custom Color.........................................................................71
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 72
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................72
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 72
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................73
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................73
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................73
Center ....................................................................................74
Face AiAF .............................................................................. 74
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....................74
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................75
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................76
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 76
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus ......................................................................................... 77
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 101
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 102
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 102
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 103
Choosing Themes for Albums .............................................103
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 104
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................105
Wi-Fi Functions ............................................................. 106
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 106
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 107
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone .............107
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode ....................................................................107
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 109
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ...................109
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu .......................... 110
Using Another Access Point ....................................................112
Previous Access Points ........................................................... 112
Saving Images to a Computer ............................................... 113
Preparing to Register a Computer ...........................................113
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................113
Installing the Software ......................................................... 113
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ................................................................... 114
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................114
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................114
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ............................... 115
Connecting to Listed Access Points .................................... 117
Previous Access Points ....................................................... 118
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ...................... 118
Registering Web Services .......................................................118
Editing Face ID Information .................................................... 88
Changing Names ....................................................................... 88
Erasing Names ..........................................................................89
Image Viewing Options .......................................................... 89
Magnifying Images ....................................................................89
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................... 90
Changing Slideshow Settings ................................................90
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe) ....................91
Protecting Images .................................................................. 91
Using the Menu .........................................................................91
Choosing Images Individually .................................................... 92
Selecting a Range .....................................................................92
Protecting All Images at Once ...................................................93
Clearing All Protection at Once .............................................93
Erasing Images ...................................................................... 93
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ...............................................94
Choosing a Selection Method ...............................................94
Choosing Images Individually ................................................94
Selecting a Range .................................................................94
Specifying All Images at Once ...............................................95
Rotating Images ..................................................................... 95
Using the Menu .........................................................................95
Deactivating Auto Rotation ........................................................96
Tagging Images as Favorites ................................................. 96
Using the Menu .........................................................................97
Editing Still Images ................................................................. 97
Resizing Images ........................................................................97
Cropping ....................................................................................98
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................99
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 99
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................100
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................133
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................133
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................134
Date and Time .........................................................................134
World Clock .............................................................................134
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 135
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................135
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................135
Screen Brightness ...................................................................136
Hiding the Start-Up Screen ......................................................136
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 136
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 137
File Numbering ........................................................................137
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 137
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................138
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 138
Display Language .................................................................... 138
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 138
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 139
Accessories ...................................................................140
System Map ......................................................................... 140
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 141
Power Supplies ........................................................................141
Other Accessories ...................................................................142
Printers ....................................................................................142
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 142
Playback on a TV ....................................................................142
Playback on a High-Denition TV ........................................ 142
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV.................................143
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 144
Using the Software ............................................................... 145
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 145
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................119
Registering Other Web Services .........................................120
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................121
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 122
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 123
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 124
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................124
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................124
Selecting a Range ...............................................................125
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................125
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................126
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........126
Adding Comments ................................................................... 126
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 127
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 127
Preparing the Camera .........................................................127
Preparing the Computer ......................................................127
Sending Images .......................................................................128
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....128
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the
Camera................................................................................. 129
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................129
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................129
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 130
Editing Connection Information ...............................................130
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................131
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................131
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................131
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................132
Setting Menu ..................................................................133
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 133
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................145
Installing the Software .........................................................145
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 145
Printing Images .................................................................... 146
Easy Print ................................................................................146
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 147
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................148
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............148
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 149
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................149
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 149
Movie Printing Options ........................................................149
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................150
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................150
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................150
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 151
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................151
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................151
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 151
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................152
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................152
Adding Images Individually ..................................................152
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................152
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................152
Appendix ........................................................................153
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 153
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 157
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 159
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................159
Battery Level .......................................................................159
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................160
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................160
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 161
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................161
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................162
Shooting Tab ............................................................................163
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 167
Playback Tab ...........................................................................168
Print Tab ..................................................................................168
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 169
Specications ....................................................................... 169
Camera Specications .............................................................169
Wi-Fi ....................................................................................170
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) ....................170
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 170
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................171
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................171
Flash Range ........................................................................171
Shooting Range ...................................................................172
Continuous Shooting Speed ................................................172
Shutter Speed .....................................................................172
Aperture ...............................................................................172
Battery Pack NB-6LH ..........................................................173
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE ...................................... 173
Index..................................................................................... 174
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 176
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 176
Security Precautions ................................................................176
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................177
Disclaimer ............................................................................177
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
31,
=
33
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
56
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
57)
Against Snow
(
=
57)
Matching specic scenes
Sports
(
=
57)
Night Scenes
(
=
57)
Low Light
(
=
57)
Fireworks
(
=
57)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
59)
Poster Effect
(
=
59)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
59)
Miniature Effect
(
=
60)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
61)
Soft Focus
(
=
61)
Monochrome
(
=
62)
● Focus on faces
-
=
31,
=
57,
=
74
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
31
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
41,
=
63
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
33
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
145
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
107
● Share images online
-
=
118
● Send images to a computer
-
=
127
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
83
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
90
● On a TV
-
=
142
● On a computer
-
=
145
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
86
● Erase images
-
=
93
● Create an album automatically
-
=
103
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
31,
=
64
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
83
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
146
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense articial
light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
16
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
● Thread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your wrist.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
17
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
170).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
136).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown, hold
the battery lock toward (1) and insert
the battery pack toward (2) until the lock
clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LY: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
● CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LY
CB-2LYE
(
1
)
(
2
)
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
● Insert the memory card with the terminals
(2) facing as shown until it clicks into
place.
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
171).
(1)
(2)
(
1
)
(
2
)
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ]
tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
19) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
141), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
94).
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
● To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
25).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
25).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
135).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
106), or when connected to a computer
(
=
145).
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to
hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-
Screen Information” (
=
159).
Display 1
Display 2
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
84).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(1) Live View Control Mode
Customize image brightness or
colors when shooting (
=
55).
(2) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
21,
=
31,
=
33).
(3) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
each shot automatically (
=
56).
(4) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(
=
57).
(5) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (
=
57).
(6) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (
=
59).
(7) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
64).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(8) P, Tv, Av, and M Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
67,
=
80).
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
139).
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
162).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item (1), and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
● Available options (2) are listed next to
menu items, on the right.
● Depending on the menu item, functions
can be specied simply by pressing the
[
] or [ ] button, or another screen is
displayed for conguring the function.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
(
1
)(
2
)
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
139).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
163 –
=
168).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
● After you have pressed the [
][ ]
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
43),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
114), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a character, and
then press the [ ] button to enter it.
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
Entering Line Breaks
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Switching Input Modes
● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
● To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [
] and press
the [ ] button.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
The previous character will be deleted.
● Choosing [
] and holding down the [ ]
button will delete ve characters at a time.
(
1
)
30
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
● Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On
Connected to a computer (
=
145), or display off
(
=
25,
=
135,
=
135)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,
shooting long exposures (
=
80,
=
81), or
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
31
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
35,
=
36).
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
32
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
● Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
33
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
31) to shoot a still image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
133).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and
40 seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
91).
- Daylight saving time (
=
19) or time zone (
=
134) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
137).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
102).
3) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded this way may be selected by the camera for Story
Highlights albums (
=
103).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
31) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
31) to compose the shot and
focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
34
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
53).
Movies
● Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while shooting
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, set Dynamic IS to [Low] (
=
52).
(
1
)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can
be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when
this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not
strong, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wind Filter] ►
[Off].
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
86).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down,
the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press
the [
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to
the subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range”
(
=
171).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
172).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
35) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
35
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
36,
=
42) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
49).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
44). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
19).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
67) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
36).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ]
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
79). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
[ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
choose [
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 120x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
67) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
38
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Reacquire the subject.
● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
● The previous magnication is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame lls the screen again.
● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [
] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [
] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [
] button.
● To adjust the area displayed when the [
] button is pressed,
access MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [ Display Area], and
choose one of the three options.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(
=
41).
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
48), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can nd it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
1
Look for the lost subject.
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
● The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [
] button.
39
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
● When
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
and some shooting settings cannot be congured.
● Auto zooming to keep multiple subjects on the screen is not
performed during movie recording, even if faces are detected.
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever, but the original zoom
factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release the
lever.
● If multiple faces are detected in step 1, you can switch the main
face used for auto zooming by pressing the [
] button.
● When a detected subject moves toward the edge of the screen,
the camera zooms out to keep the subject on the screen.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
41).
● The camera prioritizes zooming to keep subjects on the screen.
For this reason, it may not be possible to maintain a constant
face display size, depending on subject movement and shooting
conditions.
● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level
and stops zooming until a face is detected.
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement
(Auto Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep detected faces
(
=
74) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera
automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be adjusted,
as needed.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode.
● Press and release the [ ] button quickly.
● [
] is displayed.
● A white frame is displayed around the
detected face, and the camera zooms
in and out to keep the subject on the
screen.
● When multiple faces are detected, a
white frame is displayed around the main
subject’s face and up to two gray frames
around other faces, as the camera zooms
to keep these subjects on the screen.
2
Shoot.
● Auto zooming continues even after you
shoot, and the frames are still displayed.
● To cancel auto zooming, press the [
]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
40
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out, which makes it easier to nd the subject.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode (=
39).
2
Look for the lost subject.
● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you nd it.
3
Reacquire the subject.
● Once you nd the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
4
Shoot.
● To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
● When Auto is on, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose the desired option.
● The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specied size.
Auto
Auto zoom to prevent subjects from moving off the
screen.
When multiple faces are detected, the camera zooms to
keep these subjects on the screen.
Face
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Upper Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Whole Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Manual
Keep faces at the size specied by moving the zoom
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size
has been obtained.
● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (
=
28) ► [ ]
tab ► [
Auto Settings] ► [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose
[Off] to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described
in “Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)”
(
=
40).
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
● You can clear your specied face size during movie recording by
pressing the [
] button.
● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
41
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) to shoot.
● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
● When the feature described in “Auto Zooming in Response to
Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (
=
39) is deactivated, [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, and the camera automatically
zooms out when moved.
● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in “Auto
Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (
=
39),
choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [ Auto Settings] ►
[Seek Assist] ► [Off].
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
42
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (
=
172).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
41).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
31) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr.] (
=
49) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
41) to shoot.
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
43
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (
=
87).
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when
creating Story Highlights albums (
=
103).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
47).
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
93), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
87) and
ungrouped (
=
87).
● Protecting (
=
91) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (
=
86) or Smart Shufe (
=
91). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
88), magnifying (
=
89),
tagging as favorites (
=
96), editing (
=
97), printing
(
=
146), setting up individual image printing (
=
150), or
adding to a photobook (
=
152). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
87) or cancel grouping
(
=
87) rst.
44
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● After [Register?] is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
29).
● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
● After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
28).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
● A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
45
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
88).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
44).
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [
] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
84).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
42,
=
77)
continue to be recorded in the same position as the rst shot,
even if subjects move.
5
Continue registering face
information.
● To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
35) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
44).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
● When you point the camera toward
people, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
● Shoot.
● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
46
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person whose face info you want to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
● If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the person whose
information you want to check or edit, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
● To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
44).
● To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. Press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to erase
by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ]
button. After [Erase?] is displayed, choose
[OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
47
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person to erase, and then press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
86), overwrite their info (
=
88), or
search images for them (
=
87).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
89).
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
44) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
46), and then register new face
information (
=
44) as needed.
48
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose the image’s number of recording pixels from 4 levels, as follows.
For guidelines on how many shots at each recording pixel setting can t
on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
171).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting
Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on
standard-denition televisions or similar display devices. Also used
for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
49
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Three image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the
maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will t on a
memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
171).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Number of Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in
standard denition
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the
top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not
recorded.
● In [
] mode, [ ] is also available, offering smoother motion
(
=
64).
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
42), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
50
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway to enlarge the
portion of the image in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
28).
2
Check the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
37)
- When Tracking AF is used (
=
74)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
142)
● Not available in [
] mode.
Helpful Shooting Features
Displaying Grid Lines
Still Images
Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
reference while shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Grid
Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[On] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
51
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating Image Stabilization
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
28).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], and then
choose [Off] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
36).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
28).
2
Shoot.
● [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
53).
● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
mode (
=
36).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
42,
=
77).
52
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Recording
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization.
● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (
=
51) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
the desired option (
=
28).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
51).
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to
[
].
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
28).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
28).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
53
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
28).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Time]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
28).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (
=
28).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
54
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
53).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
160).
● When [Display Time] (
=
53) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. By pressing the [
]
button, you can do the following operations.
- Protect (
=
91)
- Favorites (
=
96)
- Erase (
=
93)
55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Brightness / Color Customization
(Live View Control)
Still Images
Movies
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as
follows.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
setting screen. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose a setting item, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the value as you watch the screen.
● Press the [
] button.
3
Shoot.
Brightness
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and for
darker images, adjust it to the left.
Color
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and
for more subdued images, adjust it to the left.
Tone
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right,
and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
56
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Choosing Effects
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
● After choosing [
] mode, press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect, and then press
the [ ] button.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
Enjoying a Variety of Images from
Each Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
87).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
57
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
27).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening effect.
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Focus.
● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
3
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
69) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● For details on the shooting range in [
] mode, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
172).
● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer.
● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
● Continuous shooting is not available in [
] Auto mode (
=
39).
58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
69) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
79).
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
31).
● [
] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and
cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Shooting under Low Light (Low Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Still Images
Movies
● Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of reworks.
59
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Press the [ ] button, choose an
effect level (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
27).
3
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
60
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical
or vice-versa), press the [
] button in step 2. You can move the
frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
48). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects
in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
59) and choose
[ ].
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [
][ ] buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose the speed by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
61
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Press the [ ] button, choose an
effect level (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a color
tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
62
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)
Still Images
Movies
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
57) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
● To pause smile detection, press the [
]
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
59) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a color
tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
63
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Face the camera and wink.
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
● To cancel shooting after you have triggered
the self-timer, press the [ ] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
74). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
57) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [
] button.
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
57) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will wink.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
64
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Recording Movies in Standard Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
27).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
161).
3
Shoot.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Recording Movies with Smoother Motion
Record movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate, as
follows.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Movie
Image Quality” (
=
49) and choose
[ ].
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
51) is only
available for the nal shot.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
65
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
51).
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to
[
].
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
103).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
27).
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Turn the [
] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons
to set the playback effect, as described
below.
3
Shoot (=
64).
● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before
Recording
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of –2 to +2 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
● To unlock the exposure, press the [
]
button again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
3
Shoot (=
64).
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, as when recording movies while
moving. The portion of images displayed changes more than for
[Standard], and subjects are further enlarged.
● Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording” (
=
52) to choose
[High].
66
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Effects
2x
Record a clip that is played back in fast motion.
1x
Record a clip that is played back at normal speed.
1/2x
Record a clip that is played back in slow motion.
Record a clip that is played back normally before it appears
to be rewound two seconds to show a replay of the last part.
During recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
● The movie quality is [
] (
=
49) and cannot be changed.
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1
Choose [ ].
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
27).
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
64).
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
● The movie quality is [
] (
=
49) and cannot be changed.
67
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
68 – =
79), and then shoot.
● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
69) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
77),
which may enable optimum exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
27) and MENU
(
=
28) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (
=
161).
68
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point
frame), displayed in the center of the screen.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
● Press the [
] button. As you watch
the screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
again when nished.
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
69
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness. Insufcient overall image contrast can also be automatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Auto] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
● You can also correct existing images (
=
99).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
80, 100, 200 For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
400, 800 For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight.
1600, 3200 For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms.
Choose a higher ISO speed for higher sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
70
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
70) to
choose [ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
70).
71
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
70) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
● Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and
other qualities as desired (
=
71).
● White balance (
=
70) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
172).
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to specify the general focal position, and
then press the [ ] button.
● To adjust the magnication, press the
[
] button.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
(
1
)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (
=
172).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● When the zoom position is within the range of the yellow bar
below the zoom bar, [
] turns gray and the camera cannot focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
41).
73
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
28).
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
37).
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
28).
● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (
=
73) is
[Center] and AF frame size (
=
73) is [Normal], and these
settings cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
37) or
digital tele-converter (
=
73), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
142), but the magnied display will not appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (
=
28).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
28).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
74
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
75) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the
AF Frame Mode” (
=
73) to choose
[Tracking AF].
● [
] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
Center
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [
] tab to [Small] (
=
28).
● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (
=
37) or digital tele-converter (
=
73), and in manual
focus mode (
=
72).
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
50) set to [On].
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
75
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
28).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
28) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
41).
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
] button
again.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(
=
75).
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
● [Servo AF] (
=
75) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
28) is not available.
● [
] is not available.
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
● When shooting in [
] mode (
=
72), press and hold the [ ]
button for at least one second.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (
=
43). However, when you choose a registered
person as the subject, their name is displayed.
76
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
● To unlock the focus, after you release the
shutter button, press the [
] button again
and choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial).
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
28).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
77
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
171).
1
Raise the ash.
● Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [
] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed”
(
=
172).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● The images are managed together as a
group (
=
87).
● In [ ] mode (
=
57), manual focus mode (
=
72), or when
AF is locked (
=
76), [ ] is changed to [ ].
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
41).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Continuous shooting is not available in [
] Auto mode (
=
39),
even if you choose [
].
78
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
68), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (
=
27).
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
28) and
choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (
=
28)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
79).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
79
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
171).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
51) and choose
[Shoot Only].
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
68), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
77).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● The ash res, and when
[
] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE: Flash Exposure
80
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (
=
172).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
79).
● Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/2000 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]
and cannot be changed.
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
81).
● [ ]: Time value
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
81
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (
=
172) and “Aperture” (
=
172).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter
speed (1) or aperture value (2), and turn
the [ ] dial to specify a value.
● An exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the optimum exposure (3).
● The exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from optimum
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● To have the setting that is not chosen in step 2 (whether shutter
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain optimum
exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the [
] button.
Note that optimum exposure may not be possible with some settings.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80]
and cannot be changed.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
172).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
● In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and
set [Safety Shift] on the [
] tab to [On] (
=
28) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
82
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
68).
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ] mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
28)
and choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
● You can also set the ash level in [
] or [ ] mode by
accessing MENU (
=
28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► [Manual].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (
=
28)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
83
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [
] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [
] button or turn the
[
] dial clockwise.
● Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode),
turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn
the [
] dial to browse through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
84
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or
to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see
“Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (
=
160).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
28) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
85
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
33) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a still image labeled with
[ ].
2
Play the digest movie.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
] in the menu (
=
27).
● The digest movie recorded automatically
on the day of still image shooting is
played back from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
84).
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
84).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information display
(
=
84) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
129). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose a date (
=
28).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
84),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
43)
will be displayed.
● Press the [
] button several times
until simple information display is
activated, and then press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [
] dial to choose an
image.
● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in
step 2.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
86), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
89), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
90). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
91) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
94), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
150), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
152).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
97 –
=
102), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot continuously (
=
42,
=
57,
=
77) and images shot in
[ ] mode (
=
56) are grouped, and only the rst image is displayed.
However, you can also view the images individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27).
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
91) or delete (
=
93) these images all at once.
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
44).
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
96).
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ ]
mode (
=
33).
1
Choose a search condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a condition (
=
27).
● When you have selected [
], [ ], or
[ ], choose the condition by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.
2
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
● To cancel ltered display, choose [
] in
step 1.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
88
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
86),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
View images in the group individually.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
● To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
27).
● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
86) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
89). By choosing
[Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
91),
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at
Once” (
=
94) or “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)”
(
=
150), or [All Images in Group] in “Adding Images to a
Photobook” (
=
152), all images in the group can be manipulated
at once.
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Group Images]
► [Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
56) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
89
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
(
1
)
3
Choose the editing option.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
46) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
● On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
88), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
90
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
28).
2
Congure the settings.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
28).
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each
image is displayed for about three seconds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
27).
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
25) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● In ltered display (
=
87), only images matching search
conditions are played.
91
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
93).
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27). [Protected]
is displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
136).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27).
● Four candidate images are displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
87)
- During group playback (
=
87)
92
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
91), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose an option as desired (
=
28).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
91), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
93
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
91) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27).
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
91), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
92), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
94), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
92) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
91) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose an option as desired (
=
28).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
94), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
95
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
94), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
96
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
83), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
90), “Protecting
Images” (
=
91), “Erasing Images” (
=
93), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
150), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
152)
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
27).
● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
● To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
96).
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[Off] (
=
28).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
95) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
91) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
97
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
97 –
=
100) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode
or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
103).
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
)
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies.)
98
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [
] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the number of recording
pixels after cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. Turn the [
] dial to switch frames,
which position the cropping area.
● Press the [
] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
97).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
48) or resized to [ ] (
=
97).
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
43), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
(
1
) (
3
)(
2
)
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
5
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ] button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
48).
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
28).
99
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
70).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
28).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
97).
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
70).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
28).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
97).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
100
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
97).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
28).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
89).
101
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
● The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
141).
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies,
=
33).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
83), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
102
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
33) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
83) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
● [
] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
103
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
1
Choose an image.
● Choose an image in single-image display.
● Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
● Choose a person, [Date], or [Event]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial) as the album theme, and then
press the [ ] button.
● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save Album as Movie],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (=
83).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (
=
96) to
albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
104
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● The screen at left is displayed when you
use a new or recently formatted memory
card. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), press
the [ ] button, and wait about a minute
and a half until the three types of music
are registered to the card.
● When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
● Follow steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
103) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the desired item, and then
adjust the setting by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
4
Save the album.
● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
103) to save albums.
● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
102).
● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
33)
- Short clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(
=
65)
● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
● You can specify a color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [
] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [
] button.
● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [
] button again.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from three kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
103), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
105
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Choose background music.
● When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
104),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color effect.
● On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (
=
103),
choose [Change Color Effect].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
103) to save albums.
● Up to 40 images can be selected if you choose [Image Selection].
The second time you create a custom album, [Select images
based on previous settings?] is displayed. To use previously
selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The previous images
are labeled with [
], and multiple images are displayed at once.
● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
● The color effect may not be applied to some images.
● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track], choose
[Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
] button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
103), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
3
Choose album elements.
● Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
● Press the [
] button after you
are nished selecting still images,
digest movies, and short clips in [Image
Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or
people in [Person Selection].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
106
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
107
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on
the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (
=
129). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically
after image transfer.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices N-Mark ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via NFC (
=
107)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
● Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
109)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
sending images to a smartphone (
=
109). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
110)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera users who connect their camera
to a smartphone via Wi-Fi should consider switching from the
CameraWindow mobile app to the Camera Connect mobile app.
108
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
130).
2
Establish the connection.
● Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
● The camera starts up automatically.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
● The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
● After this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
109
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Sending Images to an NFC-
Compatible Smartphone” (
=
107) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
124).
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
112).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step
2 (
=
131).
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
124).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
107) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● The images are now sent. The
connection is ended automatically after
image transfer.
110
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
7
Import images.
● Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
131).
● For better security, you can display a password on the screen
in step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
28) and choosing [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
● One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign
a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
28) ►
[
] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
112).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name) displayed
on the camera to establish a connection.
5
Start Camera Connect.
● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
● After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
6
Choose the smartphone to connect to.
● Choose the smartphone (either by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
111
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[
] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
6
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
]
button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [
] button.
You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
130).
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
109).
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Choose the smartphone to connect to,
as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
109).
112
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (
=
115).
● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
117) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
● Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
110) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
109) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
110).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
112).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
112) from step 4.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
124).
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
109) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
110).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
113
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the Internet,
access http://www.canon.com/icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
2
Install the les.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Wi-Fi” (
=
170).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
115) or not (
=
117). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
115
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
28)
► [
] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
116
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
10
Display CameraWindow.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11
Import images.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
● To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
● On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
● Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
117
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
115).
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
131).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
115).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
118
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
115).
● To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
115).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
115)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
117) from step 2.
119
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Authenticate].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Authenticate], and then
press the [ ] button.
6
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
115) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
117).
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
● Keep this screen displayed until you are
nished with step 7.
7
Enter the authentication code.
● On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
● A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2
Choose the type of camera.
● On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
● Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
3
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
120
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (
=
119).
1
Access the Web service settings
screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (
=
119) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
● In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
8
Check the conrmation number and
complete the setup process.
● Check the conrmation number on the
second screen in step 6 (displayed after
you pressed the [ ][ ] buttons or turned
the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
pressed the [ ] button).
● Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
● [
] (
=
127) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [ ] icon changes
to [ ].
● A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. You can add
other Web services, as needed. In this
case, follow the instructions from step
2 in “Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
120).
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 3 (
=
131).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
121
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
124).
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Choose the icon of the Web service
to connect to (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed.
Press the [
] button to return to the
playback screen.
122
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Choose the printer.
● Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
146).
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
112).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
110).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
123
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
110).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
112).
124
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
124), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
4
Send an image.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
124).
125
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
96).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
124), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[
] button to remove [ ].
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
2
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
2
Choose images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [
] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● To choose additional images, repeat this
step from the beginning.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
124), choose [Select
Range] and press the [
] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
92) to specify images.
● To include movies, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
126
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
28) ► [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
29).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Notes on Sending Images
● Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(
=
4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
102), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
127
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
● Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
109).
● Press the [
] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
● Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
113).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
119).
● To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
118), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Choose the type of images to send (only
when sending movies with images).
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
128
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can use
your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync while
they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
127).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
119), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server have been deleted, they can no longer be viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
● If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [
] as described in steps
1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
121).
● Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
141).
129
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Turn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ] as the mode.
2
Secure the camera.
● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
3
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
109, =
110).
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
4
Choose remote shooting.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
5
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
129)
● Shoot remotely (
=
129)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
109,
=
110,
=
130).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
19). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
134)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
130
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
● [ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ],
[
], and [ ]. However, some FUNC. and MENU settings you
have congured in advance may be changed automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
131
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
131)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
109)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
131)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
130), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
29).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
130), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
2
Choose [Change Device Nickname].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Change Device
Nickname], and then press the [ ] button
(
=
28).
3
Change the nickname.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
29), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
132
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
28).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
] tab (
=
139).
133
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic camera functions are congured on the [ ] tab of the MENU
(
=
28). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
83) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
134
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
159).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
19) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
27) or
MENU (
=
28) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
135
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
25).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
135) to [On].
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
24). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
159).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
136
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD
Brightness] setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original
brightness, press and hold the [
] button again for at least
one second or restart the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
136) memory card.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
136), press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
136) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
136), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
138
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
143)
● [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
106)
● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
109)
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
31), the
MF indicator (
=
72), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo Display], and
then press the [
] button.
139
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
43)
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
134), [Time Zone] (
=
134),
[Language
] (
=
138), and [Video System] (
=
143)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
70)
- Shooting mode chosen in [
] (
=
57) and [ ] (
=
59)
modes
- Movie mode (
=
64)
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
106)
140
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
System Map
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-6LH
*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC40
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)
*
3
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-6LH
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
● Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (
=
160).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a
Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image quality of
[ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high denition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
143
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
● Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Display images.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Denition TV” (
=
142) to display
images.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
● Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
144
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
4
Connect the power cord.
● Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
● Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
● When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
50), MF-Point Zoom (
=
72)
and MF Peaking (
=
73) are not available.
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Insert the coupler.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
17)
to open the cover.
● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
17)).
● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
17)
to close the cover.
3
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
● Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
(
1
)
145
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the computer.
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
(
1
)
(
2
)
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
127) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● To view and edit images on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with images captured by
the camera.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system
requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
113).
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(
=
113).
146
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
● Double-click [ ].
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
● To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
147
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
146) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
148).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
148).
3
Turn the printer on.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
142).
148
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
147) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
147) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the [
]
button.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
146)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
149
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
146) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing
method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
148), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
148) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
150
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
19).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
151) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and congure items as desired
(
=
28).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
150), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added to the
print list (
=
150 –
=
151), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
150), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
92) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
150), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
152), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
152), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
152), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
153
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
17).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
17).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
17).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
17).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
142).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
154
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
31).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
68).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
68,
=
68).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
34).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
171).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
78,
=
82).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
69).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
171).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
31).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
78,
=
82).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
69).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
57).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
53). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
100).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
137).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
161 –
=
167).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (
=
43). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (
=
44), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (
=
134).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
83), press the shutter button halfway (
=
25).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
26).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
48).
[
] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
34).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
34).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
79).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
77).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
69).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
79).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
25).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
172).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
52).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
74,
=
76).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
77).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
68).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
69,
=
99).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
68,
=
68).
155
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ ]
button.
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
● In simple information display mode (
=
84), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
103).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
24).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
136,
=
171).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
137).
- Lower the image quality (
=
49).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
171).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] mode (
=
60).
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
137).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
133) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
133) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] mode (
=
60) because audio is not
recorded in this mode.
156
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
132).
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
130).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
118).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
109).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
113,
=
114).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
170). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
127). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
126).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz
band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
157
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identication information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
88), Magnify* (
=
89), Smart Shufe* (
=
91), Rotate*
(
=
95), Favorites (
=
96), Edit* (
=
97), Print List* (
=
150), and
Photobook Set-up* (
=
152).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
92,
=
94,
=
151), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
150) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
152). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
150) or Photobook Set-up (
=
152) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
91), Erase
(
=
93), Favorites (
=
96), Print List (
=
150), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
152).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
137), or format the memory card (
=
136).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
17).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
17).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
17).
Memory card error (
=
137)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
17), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
31,
=
55,
=
67,
=
80) or edit images (
=
97). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
93) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
17).
Charge the battery (
=
17)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
91)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
158
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
127) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
146) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
148). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
114).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
114).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(20) AF frame (
=
73), Spot AE point
frame (
=
68)
(21) AE lock (
=
68), FE lock
(
=
79)
(22) Shutter speed (
=
80,
=
81)
(23) Aperture value (
=
81,
=
81)
(24) Exposure level (
=
81)
(25) ISO speed (
=
69)
(26) Grid lines (
=
50)
(27) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
33)
(28) Zoom bar (
=
31)
(29)
Auto (
=
39)
(30) Wind filter (
=
34)
(31) Time zone (
=
134)
(32) Image stabilization (
=
79)
(33) MF indicator (
=
72)
(34) Exposure compensation level
(
=
68)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
5
)
(
11
)(
12
)(
13
) (
14
)(
15
) (
16
) (
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
30
)
(
29
)
(
33
)(
34
)
(
10
)
(
27
)
(
21
) (
22
) (
23
) (
24
) (
25
) (
26
)
(
31
)
(
32
)
(
28
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
161), Scene
icon (
=
35)
(2) Flash mode (
=
77)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level
(
=
78,
=
82)
(4) Metering method (
=
68)
(5) Eco mode (
=
135)
(6) Drive mode (
=
77)
(7) Mercury lamp correction (
=
49),
White balance (
=
70)
(8) My Colors (
=
70)
(9) Self-timer (
=
41)
(10) Camera shake warning (
=
34)
(11) IS mode icon (
=
36)
(12) Battery level (
=
159)
(13) Still image compression (
=
79),
Recording pixel setting (
=
48)
(14) Recordable shots (
=
171)*
(15) Movie quality (
=
49)
(16) Remaining time (
=
171)
(17) Zoom magnification (
=
37),
Digital tele-converter (
=
73)
(18) Focus range (
=
72,
=
72),
AF lock (
=
76)
(19) Blink detection (
=
51)
160
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(27) Compression (image quality)
(
=
79) / Recording pixel setting
(
=
48,
=
49), Digest movies
(
=
33), MP4 (movies), Albums
(
=
103)
(28) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (
=
171)
Movies: Playback time (
=
171)
(29) File size
● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (
=
142).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
83).
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
102) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
102) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected,
=
102)
Edit (
=
101)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
146).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)(
3
) (
4
)(
5
)(
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
)
(
17
)
(
23
) (
25
) (
27
)
(
24
) (
26
)
(
28
) (
29
)
(
18
) (
19
) (
20
) (
21
) (
22
)
(1) Movies (
=
31,
=
83)
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(3) Histogram (
=
85)
(4) Battery level (
=
159)
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
126)
(6) Image Sync (
=
127)
(7) Image editing (
=
97), Movie
compression (
=
102)
(8) Favorites (
=
96)
(9) Protection (
=
91)
(10) Folder number - File number
(
=
137)
(11) Shooting date/time (
=
19)
(12) Shooting mode (
=
161)
(13) Shutter speed (
=
80,
=
81)
(14) Aperture value (
=
81,
=
81)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
=
68)
(16) ISO speed (
=
69)
(17) Metering method (
=
68)
(18) Flash (
=
77), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
78)
(19) White balance (
=
70)
(20) Mercury lamp correction (
=
49
),
Creative Shot effect (
=
56
)
(21) My Colors (
=
70,
=
99)
(22) Focus range (
=
72,
=
72)
(23) Red-eye correction (
=
100),
Short clip playback effect
(
=
65)
(24) i-Contrast (
=
69)
(25) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
48,
=
49)
(26) Group playback (
=
87)
161
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / *
3
/ *
3
/ / / / / /
/ *
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Aperture Value (
=
81)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shutter Speed (
=
81)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Program Shift (
=
68)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
AE Lock/FE Lock (
=
68,
=
79)*
4
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (
=
65)*
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Focus Range (
=
72,
=
72,
=
76)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or
automatically set in that shooting mode.
Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that
shooting mode.
Exposure Compensation (
=
68)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Self-Timer (
=
41)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Self-Timer Settings (
=
42)
Delay*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shots*
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Flash (
=
77)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
162
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
White Balance (
=
70)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
ISO Speed (
=
69)
AUTO
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
78)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Flash Output Level (
=
82)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Drive Mode (
=
77)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Tracking AF Subject Selection (
=
74)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Change Display (
=
26)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
*1 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*2 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
FUNC. Menu
Metering Method (
=
68)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
My Colors (
=
70)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / *
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
163
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Movie Quality (
=
49)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / *
4
/ / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / *
4
/ / / / / / / /
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
*3 [
] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
*4 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
60).
Shooting Tab
AF Frame (
=
73)
Face AiAF*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Tracking AF
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Center
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
*
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
48)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / *
4
/ / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / *
4
/ / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Recording Pixels (
=
48)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Compression (
=
79)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
164
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Off
/ / / / / / *
3
/ / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Continuous AF (
=
76)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
AF-assist Beam (
=
52)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
MF-Point Zoom (
=
72)
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
2x/4x
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Safety MF (
=
72)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
AF Frame Size (
=
73)*
2
Normal
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Small
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Digital Zoom (
=
37)
Standard
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
1.6x/2.0x
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
AF-Point Zoom (
=
50)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Servo AF (
=
75)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
165
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Flash Exp. Comp
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Flash Output
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Safety FE
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
i-Contrast (
=
69)
Auto
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
49)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Safety Shift (
=
81)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
MF Peaking Settings (
=
73)
Peaking
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Level
Low/High
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Color
Red/Blue/Yellow
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Flash Settings (
=
53,
=
78,
=
82)
Flash Mode
Auto
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Manual
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
166
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Grid Lines (
=
50)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
IS Settings (
=
79)
IS Mode
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Continuous
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shoot Only
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Dynamic IS
Low
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Standard
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
High
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Display Area (
=
38)
Large/Medium/Small
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Wind Filter (
=
34)
Auto/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Review image after shooting (
=
53)
Display Time
Off/Quick
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Display Info
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Detailed
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Blink Detection (
=
51)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
167
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Set Up Tab
Item Reference Page
Mute
=
133
Volume
=
133
Hints & Tips
=
134
Date/Time
=
134
Time Zone
=
134
Lens Retraction
=
135
Eco Mode
=
135
Power Saving
=
25,
=
135
LCD Brightness
=
136
Start-up Image
=
136
Format
=
136
File Numbering
=
137
Create Folder
=
137
Units
=
138
Video System
=
143
Wi-Fi Settings
=
106
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
109
Certication Logo Display
=
138
Language
=
138
Reset All
=
139
Auto Settings (
=
39,
=
40)
Seek Assist
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Auto Zoom
Face/Upper Body/Whole Body/Manual/Auto
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Digest Type (
=
33)
Include Stills/No Stills
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
Face ID Settings (
=
44)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*3 [On] when subject movement is detected in [
] mode.
- When using Face ID (
=
43) in some modes or with some settings, names of
people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.
168
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Print Tab
Item Reference Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
150
Select Range
=
151
Select All Images
=
151
Clear All Selections
=
151
Print Settings
=
150
Playback Tab
Item Reference Page
Album Playback
=
103
List/Play Digest Movies
=
86
Slideshow
=
90
Erase
=
93
Protect
=
91
Rotate
=
95
Favorites
=
96
Photobook Set-up
=
152
i-Contrast
=
99
Red-Eye Correction
=
100
Cropping
=
98
Resize
=
97
My Colors
=
99
Face ID Info
=
86
Transition Effect
=
83
Index Effect
=
86
Scroll Display
=
83
Group Images
=
87
Auto Rotate
=
96
Resume
=
83
169
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.3 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
30x zoom: 4.5 (W) – 135.0 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 25 (W) – 750 (T) mm)
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version
1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG)
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-6LH
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
112.7 x 65.8 x 34.8 mm (4.44 x 2.59 x 1.37 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 269 g (approx. 9.49 oz.; including the
battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 245 g (approx. 8.64 oz.; camera body only)
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
170
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots Approx. 230
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 315
Movie Recording Time*
1
Approx. 45 minutes
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting*
2
)
Approx. 1 hour, 15 minutes
Playback Time*
3
Approx. 4 hours
*1 Time under these conditions.
- [
] mode
- Quality: [
]
- With repeated recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2 Time under these conditions.
- [
] mode
- Quality: [
]
- Without zooming or other operations
- Recording is resumed immediately after stopping automatically at a le size of
4 GB or a time of about 29:59
*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Supported
Channels
1 ‒ 11
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
25 – 3000 mm
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 40.0 ‒ 1200 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 50.0 ‒ 1500 mm
171
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
16 GB
59 min. 30 sec.
1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec.*
4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec.
10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec.
* 52 min. 12 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
66).
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
seconds when shooting in [
], [ ] or [ ], or approximately
1 hour when shooting in [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 10 or higher
memory cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
1.4 – 2.0 m (4.6 – 6.6 ft.)
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
48) of 4:3 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory
Card (Approx. shots)
16 GB
(Large)
20M/
5184x3888
1680
2729
(Medium 1)
10M/
3648x2736
3217
5061
(Medium 2)
3M/2048x1536
9344
16755
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
53992
80988
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
172
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set
range
1 – 1/3200 sec.
Available values in
[
] mode (sec.)
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8,
0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13,
1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400,
1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200
Aperture
f/number f/3.2 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.9 – f/8.0 (T)
Available values in
[ ] mode*
F3.2, F3.5, F4.0, F4.5, F5.0, F5.6, F6.3, F6.9,
F7.1, F8.0
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(
)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
1 cm (0.4 in.) – innity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – innity
–
1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – innity 8.0 m (26 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – innity
*
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
*
1 cm (0.4 in.) – innity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – innity
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting
Mode
Speed
Approx. 6.0 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
● Speed when using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specied in Canon
testing standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
173
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-6LH
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.7 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) –
0.05 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
174
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
A
AC adapter kit 141, 144
Accessories 141
AE lock 68
AF frames 73
AF lock 76
Aspect ratio 48
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 21, 31
Av (shooting mode) 81
AV cable 143
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery charger 2, 141
Battery pack
Charging 17
Eco mode 135
Level 159
Power saving 25
Black and white images 71
Blink detection 51
C
Camera
Reset all 139
Camera access point mode 112
Camera Connect 107
CameraWindow 145
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 118
Center (AF frame mode) 74
Clock 30
Color (white balance) 70
Compression ratio (image quality) 79
Connecting via an access point 114
Continuous shooting 36, 42
Creative lters (shooting mode) 59
Creative shot 56
Cropping 98, 148
Custom white balance 70
D
Date/time
Changing 19
Date/time battery 20
Settings 19
World clock 134
DC coupler 144
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 73
Digital zoom 37
Display language 20
DPOF 150
E
Eco mode 135
Editing
Cropping 98
i-Contrast 99
My Colors 99
Red-eye correction 100
Resizing images 97
Editing or erasing connection
information 130
Erasing 93
Error messages 157
Exposure
AE lock 68
Compensation 68
FE lock 79
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 74
Face ID 43
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 63
Favorites 96
FE lock 79
File numbering 137
Fireworks (shooting mode) 58
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 59
Flash
Deactivating ash 78
Flash exposure compensation 78
On 77
Slow synchro 78
Focusing
AF frames 73
AF lock 76
AF-point zoom 50
MF peaking 73
Servo AF 75
Focus lock 74
Focus range
Macro 72
Manual focus 72
Framing assist 38
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 27
Table 162
G
Geotagging images 129
GPS information display 85
Grid lines 50
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 58
HDMI cable 142
Household power 144
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 33
I
i-Contrast 69, 99
iFrame movies (movie mode) 66
Image quality
→
Compression ratio (image quality)
Images
Display period 53
Erasing 93
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 91
Image stabilization 79
Image Sync 127
Indicator 30, 52, 53
ISO speed 69
L
Live View Control (shooting mode) 55
Low light (shooting mode) 58
M
M (shooting mode) 81
Macro (focus range) 72
Magnied display 89
Manual focus (focus range) 72
Memory cards 2
Recording time 171
Menu
Basic operations 28
Table 161
Mercury lamp correction 49
175
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Story Highlights 103
Strap 2, 16
Super vivid (shooting mode) 59
T
Terminal 143, 146
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 61
Tracking AF 74
Traveling with the camera 134
Troubleshooting 153
TV display 142
Tv (shooting mode) 80
V
Viewing 22
Image search 87
Index display 86
Magnied display 89
Single-image display 22
Slideshow 90
Smart Shufe 91
TV display 142
W
White balance (color) 70
Wi-Fi functions 106
Wi-Fi menu 110
Wind lter 34
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 63
World clock 134
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom 21, 32, 37
Metering method 68
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60
Mobile device connection button 109
Monochrome (shooting mode) 62
Movies
Editing 101
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 48, 49
Recording time 171
Multi-area White Balance 49
My Colors 70, 99
P
P (shooting mode) 67
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 152
PictBridge 142, 146
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 57
Poster effect (shooting mode) 59
Power 141
→
AC adapter kit
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
Power saving 25
Printing 146
Program AE 67
Protecting 91
R
Recording pixels (image size) 48
Red-eye correction 100
Remote shooting 129
Reset all 139
Resizing images 97
Rotating 95
S
Saving images to a computer 145
Screen
Display language 20
Icons 159, 160
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
Searching 87
Self-timer 41
2-second self-timer 41
Customizing the self-timer 42
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) 63
Wink self-timer
(shooting mode) 63
Sending images 123
Sending images to another
camera 123
Sending images to a smartphone 107
Sending images to Web services 118
Sepia tone images 71
Servo AF 75
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 159
Short clips (movie mode) 65
Slideshow 90
Smart Shufe 91
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 62
Smile (shooting mode) 62
Snow (shooting mode) 58
Soft focus (shooting mode) 61
Software
Installation 113, 145
Saving images to
a computer 145
Sounds 133
Standard (movie mode) 64
Stereo AV cable 142, 143
176
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
177
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Documenttranscriptie
Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Camera User Guide Other Shooting Modes ENGLISH P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” (= 13) section, before using the camera. ●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly. ●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages. : Next page Setting Menu : Previous page : Page before you clicked a link Accessories ●● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right. Appendix Index © CANON INC. 2015 CDD-E637-010 1 Before Use Compatible Memory Cards The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● SD memory cards*1 Initial Information ●● SDHC memory cards*1*2 Camera Basics ●● SDXC memory cards* * Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 2 Package Contents Other Shooting Modes Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer. *1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera. *2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Camera Battery Pack NB-6LH* Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Wrist Strap Index * Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack. ●● Printed matter is also included. ●● A memory card is not included (= 2). 2 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable. ●● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings. ●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images. ●● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera. ●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. This does not indicate damage. Conventions in This Guide ●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding controls in “Part Names” (= 4). [ ] Up button (12) on back [ ] Left button (8) on back [ ] Right button (13) on back [ ] Down button (15) on back [ ] Control dial (7) on back Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets. ●● : Important information you should know ●● : Notes and tips for expert camera use Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a page number) Wi-Fi Functions ●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. Setting Menu ●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as the “memory card”. Accessories ●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate how the function is used—whether for still images or movies. Appendix Index 3 Before Use Part Names (4) (5) (6)(7) (8) Basic Guide (9) (10) (11)(12) (1) (2) Advanced Guide (3) (4) Camera Basics (1) (2) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (5) (3) (7) (8) (13) (14) (15) (16) (10) (1) Microphone (9) Flash (2) Lamp (10) (N-Mark)* (3) Lens (11) [ (Flash pop up)] switch (4) (Framing Assist – Seek)] (12) [ button (5) Zoom lever Shooting:[ [ Playback:[ [ (telephoto)] / (wide angle)] (magnify)] / (index)] Movie button (6) Shutter button (7) Power button (8) Wi-Fi antenna area * Used with NFC features (= 107). (1) Screen (LCD monitor) (10) [ (2) Speaker (3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) / DIGITAL terminal Playback Mode (Display)] button Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu (Exposure compensation)] / (Wi-Fi)] / Up button (4) HDMITM terminal (13) Serial number (Body number) (5) (13) [ (Flash)] / Right button (14) Tripod socket (6) [ (15) DC coupler terminal cover (7) (16) Memory card/battery cover (8) [ [ (17) Strap mount Tv, Av, and M Mode (11) [ (Mobile Device Connection)] button (12) [ [ Mode dial P Mode (13) (14) (15) (16) (9) (17) Other Shooting Modes (11) (12) (6) Accessories Appendix (14) FUNC. (Function) / SET button (Playback)] button Control dial (Macro)] / (Manual focus)] / Left button (Story (15) [ (Self-timer)] / [ Highlights)] / Down button (16) [ Index ] button (9) Indicator ●● Turning the control dial is one way to choose setting items, switch images, and perform other operations. Most of these operations are also possible with the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. 4 Table of Contents Before Use Advanced Guide Camera Basics................................................................. 24 Package Contents..................................................................... 2 Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2 Shutter Button......................................................................... 25 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3 Shooting Modes...................................................................... 26 Conventions in This Guide........................................................ 3 Shooting Display Options........................................................ 26 Part Names............................................................................... 4 Using the FUNC. Menu........................................................... 27 Common Camera Operations..................................................11 Using the Menu Screen........................................................... 28 Safety Precautions.................................................................. 13 On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 29 Basic Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Clock....................................................................................... 30 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode....................................... 31 Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 31 Attaching the Strap.....................................................................16 Holding the Camera....................................................................16 Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................17 Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card....................17 Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................18 Setting the Date and Time..........................................................19 Changing the Date and Time..................................................19 Display Language.......................................................................20 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................31 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................33 Digest Movie Playback...........................................................34 Still Images/Movies................................................................34 Still Images.............................................................................34 Movies....................................................................................34 Scene Icons................................................................................35 Continuous Shooting Scenes.................................................36 Image Stabilization Icons............................................................36 On-Screen Frames.....................................................................37 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................21 Viewing.......................................................................................22 Erasing Images......................................................................23 Advanced Guide Indicator Display...................................................................... 30 Basic Operations............................................................. 16 Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 21 Basic Guide On/Off...................................................................................... 24 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................25 Power Saving in Shooting Mode............................................25 Power Saving in Playback Mode............................................25 Initial Information............................................................... 2 Before Use Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 37 Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................37 Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek).............................................................38 5 Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)................................................................................39 Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size.............................40 Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)...............................................................................40 Using the Self-Timer...................................................................41 Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................41 Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................42 Continuous Shooting..................................................................42 Image Display during Playback..............................................43 Using Face ID......................................................................... 43 Personal Information..................................................................43 Registering Face ID Information.................................................44 Shooting.....................................................................................45 Checking and Editing Registered Information............................46 Overwriting and Adding Face Information..............................46 Erasing Registered Information..............................................47 Image Customization Features............................................... 48 Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................48 Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size)...........48 Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)...................................................48 Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps............49 Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................49 Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 50 Displaying Grid Lines..................................................................50 Magnifying the Area in Focus.....................................................50 Checking for Closed Eyes..........................................................51 Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................51 Deactivating Image Stabilization............................................51 Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Recording....................................................................52 Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 52 Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing................................52 Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up.......53 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................53 Changing the Image Display Period after Shots....................53 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots..........................54 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Other Shooting Modes..................................................... 55 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control)............. 55 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)........................................................................ 56 Other Shooting Modes P Mode Choosing Effects........................................................................56 Moving Subjects (Sports)........................................................ 57 Specific Scenes....................................................................... 57 Tv, Av, and M Mode Image Effects (Creative Filters)............................................... 59 Playback Mode Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............59 Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............60 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips)............................................................60 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............61 Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...............................................61 Shooting in Monochrome............................................................62 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 62 Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)..................62 Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)..........................62 Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)...........63 Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face Self-Timer)....................................................................63 Index Recording Various Movies....................................................... 64 Recording Movies in Standard Mode.........................................64 Recording Movies with Smoother Motion...............................64 Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording.....65 6 Correcting Severe Camera Shake.........................................65 Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode........................................65 Playback Effects.....................................................................66 Recording iFrame Movies...........................................................66 P Mode.............................................................................. 67 Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 67 Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 68 Flash....................................................................................... 77 Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................77 Auto........................................................................................77 On...........................................................................................77 Slow Synchro.........................................................................78 Off...........................................................................................78 Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation.............................78 Shooting with the FE Lock..........................................................79 Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............68 Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock).......................68 Changing the Metering Method..................................................68 Changing the ISO Speed............................................................69 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................69 Tv, Av, and M Mode.......................................................... 80 Image Colors........................................................................... 70 Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 80 Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance).................................70 Custom White Balance...........................................................70 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................70 Custom Color.........................................................................71 Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)...................................... 81 Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 72 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................72 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode................................................72 Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking).....................73 Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................73 Changing the AF Frame Mode...................................................73 Center.....................................................................................74 Face AiAF...............................................................................74 Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)......................74 Shooting with Servo AF..........................................................75 Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................76 Shooting with the AF Lock..........................................................76 Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in Focus..........................................................................................77 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Settings......................................................................... 79 Other Shooting Modes Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality).....................79 Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................79 P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)...... 81 Adjusting the Flash Output.........................................................82 Wi-Fi Functions Playback Mode................................................................. 83 Setting Menu Viewing.................................................................................... 83 Switching Display Modes............................................................84 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights).......................85 Histogram...............................................................................85 GPS Information Display........................................................85 Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)...........................................................................85 Viewing by Date......................................................................86 Checking People Detected in Face ID........................................86 Accessories Appendix Index Browsing and Filtering Images................................................ 86 Navigating through Images in an Index......................................86 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions..........................87 Viewing Individual Images in a Group........................................87 7 Editing Face ID Information..................................................... 88 Editing Movies....................................................................... 101 Changing Names........................................................................88 Erasing Names...........................................................................89 Reducing File Sizes..................................................................102 Editing Digest Movies...............................................................102 Image Viewing Options........................................................... 89 Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)........................................ 103 Magnifying Images.....................................................................89 Viewing Slideshows....................................................................90 Changing Slideshow Settings.................................................90 Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle).....................91 Choosing Themes for Albums..............................................103 Adding Background Music to Albums.......................................104 Creating Your Own Albums.......................................................105 Protecting Images................................................................... 91 Using the Menu..........................................................................91 Choosing Images Individually.....................................................92 Selecting a Range......................................................................92 Protecting All Images at Once....................................................93 Clearing All Protection at Once..............................................93 Erasing Images....................................................................... 93 Erasing Multiple Images at Once................................................94 Choosing a Selection Method................................................94 Choosing Images Individually.................................................94 Selecting a Range..................................................................94 Specifying All Images at Once................................................95 Rotating Images...................................................................... 95 Using the Menu..........................................................................95 Deactivating Auto Rotation.........................................................96 Tagging Images as Favorites.................................................. 96 Using the Menu..........................................................................97 Editing Still Images.................................................................. 97 Resizing Images.........................................................................97 Cropping.....................................................................................98 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................99 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................99 Correcting Red-Eye..................................................................100 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Wi-Fi Functions.............................................................. 106 Available Wi-Fi Features....................................................... 106 Other Shooting Modes Sending Images to a Smartphone......................................... 107 P Mode Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone..............107 Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode.....................................................................107 Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode....109 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button....................109 Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu........................... 110 Using Another Access Point..................................................... 112 Previous Access Points............................................................ 112 Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Saving Images to a Computer................................................113 Preparing to Register a Computer............................................ 113 Checking Your Computer Environment................................ 113 Installing the Software.......................................................... 113 Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only).................................................................... 114 Saving Images to a Connected Computer................................ 114 Confirming Access Point Compatibility................................. 114 Using WPS-Compatible Access Points................................ 115 Connecting to Listed Access Points..................................... 117 Previous Access Points........................................................ 118 Accessories Appendix Index Sending Images to a Registered Web Service.......................118 Registering Web Services........................................................ 118 8 Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY............................... 119 Registering Other Web Services..........................................120 Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................121 Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 122 Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 123 Image Sending Options......................................................... 124 Sending Multiple Images..........................................................124 Choosing Images Individually...............................................124 Selecting a Range................................................................125 Sending Favorite Images.....................................................125 Notes on Sending Images........................................................126 Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size).........126 Adding Comments....................................................................126 Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)........................ 127 Initial Preparations....................................................................127 Preparing the Camera..........................................................127 Preparing the Computer.......................................................127 Sending Images........................................................................128 Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....128 Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera................................................................................. 129 Geotagging Images on the Camera.........................................129 Shooting Remotely...................................................................129 Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 130 Editing Connection Information................................................130 Changing a Device Nickname..............................................131 Erasing Connection Information...........................................131 Changing the Camera Nickname.........................................131 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default....................................132 Setting Menu................................................................... 133 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions....................................... 133 Silencing Camera Operations...................................................133 Adjusting the Volume................................................................133 Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................134 Date and Time..........................................................................134 World Clock..............................................................................134 Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................135 Using Eco Mode.......................................................................135 Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................135 Screen Brightness....................................................................136 Hiding the Start-Up Screen.......................................................136 Formatting Memory Cards........................................................136 Low-Level Formatting...........................................................137 File Numbering.........................................................................137 Date-Based Image Storage......................................................137 Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................138 Checking Certification Logos....................................................138 Display Language.....................................................................138 Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................138 Restoring Default Camera Settings..........................................139 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories.................................................................... 140 Accessories System Map.......................................................................... 140 Appendix Optional Accessories............................................................. 141 Power Supplies.........................................................................141 Other Accessories....................................................................142 Printers.....................................................................................142 Index Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 142 Playback on a TV.....................................................................142 Playback on a High-Definition TV.........................................142 Playback on a Standard-Definition TV.................................143 Powering the Camera with Household Power..........................144 Using the Software................................................................ 145 Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................145 9 Checking Your Computer Environment................................145 Installing the Software..........................................................145 Saving Images to a Computer..................................................145 Printing Images..................................................................... 146 Easy Print.................................................................................146 Configuring Print Settings.........................................................147 Cropping Images before Printing..........................................148 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................148 Available Layout Options......................................................149 Printing ID Photos................................................................149 Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................149 Movie Printing Options.........................................................149 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................150 Configuring Print Settings.....................................................150 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................150 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................151 Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................151 Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................151 Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................151 Adding Images to a Photobook................................................152 Choosing a Selection Method..............................................152 Adding Images Individually...................................................152 Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................152 Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................152 Appendix......................................................................... 153 Troubleshooting..................................................................... 153 On-Screen Messages........................................................... 157 On-Screen Information.......................................................... 159 Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 161 Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................161 FUNC. Menu.............................................................................162 Shooting Tab.............................................................................163 Set Up Tab................................................................................167 Playback Tab............................................................................168 Print Tab...................................................................................168 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Handling Precautions............................................................ 169 Specifications........................................................................ 169 Other Shooting Modes Camera Specifications..............................................................169 Wi-Fi.....................................................................................170 Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent).....................170 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time...............170 Number of Shots per Memory Card.....................................171 Recording Time per Memory Card.......................................171 Flash Range.........................................................................171 Shooting Range....................................................................172 Continuous Shooting Speed.................................................172 Shutter Speed......................................................................172 Aperture................................................................................172 Battery Pack NB-6LH...........................................................173 Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE.......................................173 P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index..................................................................................... 174 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions......................................... 176 Index Radio Wave Interference Precautions......................................176 Security Precautions.................................................................176 Trademarks and Licensing...................................................177 Disclaimer.............................................................................177 Shooting (Information Display).................................................159 Battery Level........................................................................159 Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................................160 Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................160 10 Before Use Applying special effects Common Camera Operations Basic Guide Vivid Colors (= 59) Shoot Poster Effect (= 59) Fish-Eye Effect (= 59) Advanced Guide ●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode) -- = 31, = 33 ●● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined settings (Creative Shot Mode) -- = 56 Shooting people well Portraits (= 57) Night Scenes (= 57) Miniature Effect (= 60) Toy Camera Effect (= 61) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Soft Focus (= 61) Other Shooting Modes P Mode Monochrome (= 62) Against Snow (= 57) Low Light (= 57) Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Focus on faces -- = 31, = 57, = 74 Matching specific scenes Sports (= 57) Camera Basics Fireworks (= 57) Playback Mode ●● Without using the flash (Flash Off) -- = 31 Wi-Fi Functions ●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) -- = 41, = 63 Setting Menu ●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest) -- = 33 Accessories Appendix Index 11 View ●● View images (Playback Mode) -- = 83 ●● Automatic playback (Slideshow) -- = 90 ●● On a TV -- = 142 ●● On a computer -- = 145 ●● Browse through images quickly -- = 86 ●● Erase images -- = 93 Save ●● Save images to a computer via a cable -- = 145 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Use Wi-Fi Functions Camera Basics ●● Send images to a smartphone -- = 107 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Share images online -- = 118 Other Shooting Modes ●● Send images to a computer -- = 127 P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Create an album automatically -- = 103 Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Shoot/View Movies Setting Menu ●● Shoot movies -- = 31, = 64 Accessories ●● View movies (Playback Mode) -- = 83 Print Appendix Index ●● Print pictures -- = 146 12 Safety Precautions ●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly. ●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other persons from being injured or incurring property damage. ●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use. Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. ●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside. This could result in electrical shock or fire. If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately. Before Use ●● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. This could damage your eyesight. Advanced Guide ●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. ●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions. -- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. -- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands. -- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet. -- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug. -- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if your product uses one. This could result in electrical shock or fire. ●● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it. ●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. ●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when dropped. ●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. ●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries. ●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame. This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water. ●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product. Camera Basics ●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the product and distance yourself from it. ●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants when using the flash. ●● Use only recommended power sources. Basic Guide Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. 13 ●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods. Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin. Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. ●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects. ●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. ●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts. If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments. ●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing. This could result in burns or damage to the flash. ●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places: -- Places subject to direct sunlight -- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) -- Humid or dusty places These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash. This could result in injury. Caution Denotes the possibility of property damage. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components. Camera Basics ●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. Other Shooting Modes ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open. This may cause the product to malfunction. P Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a cotton swab or cloth. The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the product to malfunction. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using the product. Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage. ●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators. Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. ●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods. ●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. ●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly. If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass may lead to cuts. ●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets. Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire. Accessories Appendix Index 14 ●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed. This may cause the product to malfunction. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it faces the body), if your product’s screen closes. Other Shooting Modes ●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 15 Basic Guide Initial Preparations Before Use Basic Guide Prepare for shooting as follows. Advanced Guide Attaching the Strap Basic Operations Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Thread the end of the strap through the strap mount (1), and then pull the other end of the strap through the loop on the threaded end (2). (2) Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode (1) Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Holding the Camera Accessories ●● Place the strap around your wrist. ●● When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it. Appendix Index 16 Charging the Battery Pack Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged. (1) (2) 1 Insert the battery pack. ●● After aligning the marks on the battery pack and charger, insert the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and down (2). 2 Charge the battery pack. (2 ) (1) CB-2LY ●● CB-2LY: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the charger into a power outlet (2). ●● CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet. ●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 170). ●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. ●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. (2) Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 1 Open the cover. (2) Setting Menu ●● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2). ●● When charging is finished, the lamp turns green. Accessories (1) 2 ●● After unplugging the battery charger, remove the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and up (2). ●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. ●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. Advanced Guide Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately). Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera (= 136). 3 Remove the battery pack. (1) Basic Guide Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ●● The charging lamp turns orange, and charging begins. CB-2LYE Before Use (1) (2) Appendix Insert the battery pack. ●● Holding the battery pack with the terminals in the position shown, hold the battery lock toward (1) and insert the battery pack toward (2) until the lock clicks shut. Index ●● If you insert the battery pack facing the wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted. 17 (1) (2) 3 Check your card’s write-protect switch and insert the memory card. ●● Recording is not possible on memory cards with a write-protect switch when the switch is in the locked position. Move the switch toward (1). ●● Insert the memory card with the terminals (2) facing as shown until it clicks into place. ●● Make sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera. 4 Close the cover. (1) (2) ●● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide it, until it clicks into the closed position (2). Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card Remove the battery pack. ●● Open the cover and press the battery lock in the direction of the arrow. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The battery pack will pop up. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Remove the memory card. ●● Push the memory card in until it clicks, and then slowly release it. P Mode ●● The memory card will pop up. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 171). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 18 Setting the Date and Time Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date. 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. ●● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Changing the Date and Time 2 Set the date and time. Adjust the date and time as follows. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to specify the date and time. P Mode 1 Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. ●● When finished, press the [ ●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/ Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. ●● Press the [ Tv, Av, and M Mode ] button. ] ] button. Playback Mode ●● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ tab. 3 Specify your home time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your home time zone. 4 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed. Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose [Date/Time]. Setting Menu ] Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Change the date and time. Appendix Index ●● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19) to adjust the settings. ●● Press the [ menu screen. ] button to close the ●● To turn off the camera, press the power button. 19 ●● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed. ●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 141), even if the camera is left off. ●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). Before Use Display Language Basic Guide Change the display language as needed. 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ Advanced Guide ] button. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Access the setting screen. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then immediately press the [ ] button. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 3 Set the display language. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Once the display language has been set, the setting screen is no longer displayed. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after ] button. pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2. ●● You can also change the display language by pressing the ] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab. [ 20 Trying the Camera Out Still Images Movies Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them. Shooting (Smart Auto) Shoot. Shooting Still Images 4 Before Use 1) Focus. Basic Guide ●● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Other Shooting Modes 1 Turn the camera on. P Mode ●● Press the power button. ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ ]. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen. ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 3 Compose the shot. ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2) Shoot. Accessories ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. Appendix Index ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. 21 Recording Movies 1) Start recording. (1) ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. 2) Finish recording. ●● Press the movie button again to stop recording. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. Before Use Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ Camera Basics ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Your last shot is displayed. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose images. ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial clockwise. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images quickly. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through images. ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. ●● Movies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. Accessories Appendix Index ] icon. 22 3 Play movies. Erasing Images ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. ●● Playback now begins, and after the movie ] is displayed. is finished, [ ●● To adjust the volume, press the [ buttons during playback. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. ][ Before Use You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. Basic Guide 1 Choose an image to erase. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Advanced Guide ] Camera Basics ] Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Erase the image. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The current image is now erased. ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories ●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 94). Appendix Index 23 Advanced Guide Before Use On/Off Basic Guide Shooting Mode Advanced Guide ●● Press the power button to turn the camera on and prepare for shooting. Camera Basics Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including shooting and playback options Camera Basics ●● To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on and view your shots. ●● To turn the camera off, press the [ button again. P Mode ] Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ] button. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway (= 25). ●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is ] button. retracted by pressing the [ Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 24 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity. Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 25). Before Use Shutter Button Basic Guide To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot. In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.) ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice, and frames are displayed around image areas in focus. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. ●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if you prefer (= 135). ●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via Wi-Fi (= 106), or when connected to a computer (= 145). Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Press all the way down. (From the Playback Mode halfway position, press fully to shoot.) ●● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. Setting Menu ●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway. ●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends. Accessories Appendix Index 25 Shooting Modes Shooting Display Options Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. (8) (1) (2) Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “OnScreen Information” (= 159). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (3) Display 1 (4) (5) (1) Live View Control Mode Customize image brightness or colors when shooting (= 55). (6) Creative Filters Mode Add a variety of effects to images when shooting (= 59). (2) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Fully automatic shooting, with camera-determined settings (= 21, = 31, = 33). (7) Movie Mode For shooting movies (= 64). You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not set to Movie mode, simply by pressing the movie button. (3) (4) (5) Creative Shot Mode See several effects applied to each shot automatically (= 56). Sports Mode Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects (= 57). Special Scene Mode Shoot with optimal settings for specific scenes (= 57). Other Shooting Modes (7) (6) (8) P, Tv, Av, and M Modes Take a variety of shots using your preferred settings (= 67, = 80). P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Display 2 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories ●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images. ●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 84). Appendix Index 26 4 Finish the setup process. Using the FUNC. Menu ●● Press the [ Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as follows. Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (= 162). 1 Access the FUNC. menu. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● The screen before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 139). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Choose a menu item. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a menu item (1), and then press the [ ] or [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Available options (2) are listed next to menu items, on the right. (1) (2) Wi-Fi Functions ●● Depending on the menu item, functions can be specified simply by pressing the [ ] or [ ] button, or another screen is displayed for configuring the function. Setting Menu Accessories 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an option. Appendix ] Index ] icon can ●● Options labeled with a [ be configured by pressing the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu items, press the [ ] button. 27 4 Choose an option. Using the Menu Screen ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 163 – = 168). 1 5 Finish the setup process. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1. Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ Before Use Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a tab. P Mode ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 139). ●● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● After you have pressed the [ ][ ] buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a tab initially, you can switch between tabs by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix 3 Choose a menu item. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose a menu item. ] Index ●● For menu items with options not shown, first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch screens, and then either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the menu item. ●● To return to the previous screen, press ] button. the [ 28 Confirming Input and Returning to the Previous Screen On-Screen Keyboard Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 43), Wi-Fi connections (= 114), and so on. Note that the length and type of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using. (1) ●● Press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Entering Characters ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a character, and then press the [ ] button to enter it. ●● The amount of information you can enter (1) varies depending on the function you are using. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Moving the Cursor ●● Choose [ button. ] or [ ] and press the [ Playback Mode ] Wi-Fi Functions Entering Line Breaks ●● Choose [ ] and press the [ Setting Menu ] button. Switching Input Modes Accessories ●● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. ●● To switch between uppercase and lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. ●● Available input modes vary depending on the function you are using. Appendix Index Deleting Characters ●● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. The previous character will be deleted. ] and holding down the [ ] ●● Choosing [ button will delete five characters at a time. 29 Indicator Display The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks depending on the camera status. Color Indicator Status Camera Status On Connected to a computer (= 145), or display off (= 25, = 135, = 135) Blinking Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting long exposures (= 80, = 81), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi Green Before Use Clock Basic Guide You can check the current time. ●● Press and hold the [ ] button. Advanced Guide ●● The current time appears. Camera Basics ●● If you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to change the display color. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button again to cancel the clock display. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. Playback Mode ●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ press the power button to display the clock. ] button, then Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 30 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Shooting (Smart Auto) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting Movies Other Shooting Modes 1 Turn the camera on. P Mode ●● Press the power button. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ Playback Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Wi-Fi Functions ]. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen (= 35, = 36). ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 31 3 Compose the shot. (1) 2) Shoot. ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position is displayed, along with the range of focus (2).) ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. (2) 4 Shoot. Shooting Still Images ●● Several frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus. P Mode 1) Start recording. 1) Focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. Other Shooting Modes Recording Movies (1) ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. Accessories ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. ●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. 2) Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed. Appendix Index ●● To resize the subject, repeat the operations in step 3. However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded. Note that movies shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy. ●● When you recompose shots, the focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted. 32 3 Shoot. 3) Finish recording. ●● Press the movie button again to stop recording. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. ●● Recording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. ●● The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-area White Balance). Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images Movies You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are later combined in a digest movie. Clips recorded this way may be selected by the camera for Story Highlights albums (= 103). 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 31) and choose [ ]. 2 Compose the shot. ●● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 31) to compose the shot and focus. ●● For more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four seconds before shooting still images. ●● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 31) to shoot a still image. ●● The camera records both a still image and movie clip. The clip, which ends with the still image and a shutter sound, forms a single chapter in the digest movie. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because digest movies are recorded for each shot. ●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image ] mode, or immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ operating the camera in other ways. ●● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded in digest movies. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed. ●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (= 133). ●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following ] mode. cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ -- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40 seconds. -- The digest movie is protected (= 91). -- Daylight saving time (= 19) or time zone (= 134) settings are changed. -- A new folder is created (= 137). ●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased. ●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Digest Type] ► [No Stills]. ●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 102). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 33 Digest Movie Playback Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 86). Still Images/Movies ●● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press ] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then the [ press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. ●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 53). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Movies Camera Basics ●● Keep your fingers away from the microphone (1) while shooting movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (1 ) Other Shooting Modes Still Images ●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. ●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 171). ●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 172). ●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit when shooting in low-light conditions. ●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again. ●● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies (Sleeping) icons (= 35) are displayed. ●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used. P Mode ●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded. ●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, set Dynamic IS to [Low] (= 52). Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Audio is recorded in stereo. ●● Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wind Filter] ► [Off]. Accessories Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Appendix Index 34 ●● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ and the background color of [ ] is orange. Scene Icons Still Images Movies In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 36). Background Subject Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights People *2 *3 3 3 Moving People * Shadows on Face *2 Smiling *3 Sleeping * – – – – – – – *3 – – – *2 *3 – – – Babies *3 *3 – – – Smiling Babies *3 *3 – – – Sleeping Babies *2 *3 – – – Moving Children *3 *3 – – – 2 * 3 Other Moving Subjects * 3 *3 – – – Other Close-Range Subjects *2 *3 – – Other Subjects * – ] is dark blue, Before Use ●● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects icons are displayed. Basic Guide ●● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects. Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects: moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies; moving children; and other moving subjects. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving children in drive modes other than [ ] (= 36, = 42) and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected (= 49). Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people when the flash is set to [ ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years old) are detected (= 44). Confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 19). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 67) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness. Accessories Appendix Index *1 Tripod Used *2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds. *3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, and gray for all other backgrounds. 35 Continuous Shooting Scenes If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or [ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously. Before Use Image Stabilization Icons Still Images Movies Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Image stabilization for still images (Normal) Smiling (including Babies) Sleeping (including Babies) Children Consecutive images are captured, and the camera analyzes details such as facial expressions to save the image determined to be the best. Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by combining consecutive shots to reduce camera shake and image noise. The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played. So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children who move around, the camera will capture three consecutive images for each shot. ●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images may not look as expected. ●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot. ●● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ]. choose [ ] in the menu, and then select [ ] button, Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)* Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is used (Hybrid IS). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as when shooting while walking (Dynamic) Tv, Av, and M Mode Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting movies at telephoto (Powered) Playback Mode No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. ●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 79). In this case, an IS icon is not displayed. ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed. ●● In [ Accessories Appendix Index 36 On-Screen Frames Before Use Common, Convenient Features Still Images Basic Guide Movies In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at. ●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen. Still Images Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 120x enlargement. 1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 67) if no frames are displayed, if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas. Advanced Guide Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) Other Shooting Modes ]. ●● Hold the lever until zooming stops. P Mode ●● Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor before the image becomes noticeably grainy, which is then indicated on the screen. (1) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [ again. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ] Wi-Fi Functions ●● The camera zooms in even closer on the subject. Setting Menu ●● (1) is the current zoom factor. Accessories Appendix Index 37 ●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range. -- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy. -- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus). -- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy. ●● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording pixel settings (= 48), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1. ●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off]. Movies If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can find it more easily by temporarily zooming out. 1 Look for the lost subject. ●● Press and hold the [ ●● Aim the camera so that the subject enters the white frame, and then release the [ ] button. ●● The previous magnification is now restored, so that the area within the white frame fills the screen again. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is zoomed out. ●● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you press the [ ] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and camera operating sounds are recorded. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ] tab Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek) Still Images 2 Reacquire the subject. ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1, press the shutter button all the way down. ●● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when you release the [ ] button by moving the zoom lever to resize the white frame while you hold the [ ] button. ●● To adjust the area displayed when the [ ] button is pressed, Display Area], and access MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [ choose one of the three options. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode (= 41). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● The camera zooms out and displays a white frame around the area shown before you pressed the [ ] button. 38 Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom) Still Images Movies The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep detected faces (= 74) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be adjusted, as needed. 1 Enter [ ] Auto mode. ●● Press and release the [ ●● [ ] button quickly. ●● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or facing the camera indirectly. ●● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera operating sounds are recorded. Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed, ●● When and some shooting settings cannot be configured. ●● Auto zooming to keep multiple subjects on the screen is not performed during movie recording, even if faces are detected. ●● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever, but the original zoom factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ] is displayed. ●● A white frame is displayed around the detected face, and the camera zooms in and out to keep the subject on the screen. ●● When multiple faces are detected, a white frame is displayed around the main subject’s face and up to two gray frames around other faces, as the camera zooms to keep these subjects on the screen. 2 Shoot. ●● Auto zooming continues even after you shoot, and the frames are still displayed. ●● To cancel auto zooming, press the [ ] button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed. ●● If multiple faces are detected in step 1, you can switch the main face used for auto zooming by pressing the [ ] button. ●● When a detected subject moves toward the edge of the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the subject on the screen. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode (= 41). ●● The camera prioritizes zooming to keep subjects on the screen. For this reason, it may not be possible to maintain a constant face display size, depending on subject movement and shooting conditions. ●● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level and stops zooming until a face is detected. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 39 Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ●● When Auto is on, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. ●● The camera zooms automatically to keep faces at the specified size. Auto zoom to prevent subjects from moving off the screen. When multiple faces are detected, the camera zooms to keep these subjects on the screen. Auto Face Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions clearly. Upper Body Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper body. Whole Body Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire body. Manual Keep faces at the size specified by moving the zoom lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size has been obtained. ●● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (= 28) ► [ ] Auto Settings] ► [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose tab ► [ [Off] to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in “Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)” (= 40). ●● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever. ●● You can clear your specified face size during movie recording by pressing the [ ] button. ●● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording. Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist) Still Images Movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms out, which makes it easier to find the subject. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Enter [ ] Auto mode (= 39). 2 Look for the lost subject. Other Shooting Modes ●● When you move the camera to look for the subject, the camera zooms out to help you find it. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 3 Reacquire the subject. Playback Mode ●● Once you find the subject and stop moving the camera, the camera zooms in again. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 4 Shoot. ●● To cancel this mode, press the [ ] button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed. 40 ●● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera. ●● When the feature described in “Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (= 39) is deactivated, [ ] is displayed around a detected face, and the camera automatically zooms out when moved. ●● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed halfway. ●● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in “Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (= 39), Auto Settings] ► choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [ [Seek Assist] ► [Off]. Using the Self-Timer Still Images Movies With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. ] is 2 Shoot. Before Use ●● For Still Images: Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down. Basic Guide ●● For Movies: Press the movie button. Advanced Guide ●● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking and sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) Other Shooting Modes ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the [ ] button. P Mode ●● To restore the original setting, choose [ in step 1. Tv, Av, and M Mode ] Playback Mode Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake Still Images Wi-Fi Functions Movies Setting Menu This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. Accessories ●● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) and choose [ ]. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. Appendix Index ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) to shoot. 41 Customizing the Self-Timer Still Images Movies Still Images You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the delay time or number of shots. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a value, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Before Use Continuous Shooting Movies In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 172). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 27). Other Shooting Modes ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. P Mode ] is Tv, Av, and M Mode ] is ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 41) to shoot. ●● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has no effect. ●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. ●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Shoot. Setting Menu ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway. ●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 41). ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. ●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. ●● Multi-area White Balance (= 31) is not available. Similarly, [Hg Lamp Corr.] (= 49) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. Accessories Appendix Index 42 Image Display during Playback Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the screen. ●● If you erase a grouped image (= 93), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. ●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 87) and ungrouped (= 87). ●● Protecting (= 91) a grouped image will protect all images in the group. ●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image Search (= 86) or Smart Shuffle (= 91). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped. ●● The following actions are not available for grouped images: editing Face ID information (= 88), magnifying (= 89), tagging as favorites (= 96), editing (= 97), printing (= 146), setting up individual image printing (= 150), or adding to a photobook (= 152). To do these things, either view grouped images individually (= 87) or cancel grouping (= 87) first. Using Face ID If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting. This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person among a large number of images (= 87). Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when creating Story Highlights albums (= 103). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Personal Information Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting images online where many others can view them. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names, and birthdays) from the camera (= 47). Accessories Appendix Index 43 Registering Face ID Information You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12 people to use with Face ID. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 28). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then press the [ ] button. ●● After [Register?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use ●● The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed. Advanced Guide Basic Guide Camera Basics 3 Register the person’s name and Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode birthday. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter the name (= 29). P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile] screen, choose [Birthday] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose [Add a New Face], and then press the [ ] button. ] Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to specify the date. ●● When finished, press the [ Setting Menu ] Accessories ] button. Appendix 4 Save the settings. 2 Register face information. ●● Aim the camera so that the face of the person you want to register is inside the gray frame at the center of the screen. ●● A white frame on the person’s face indicates that the face is recognized. Make sure a white frame is displayed on the face, and then shoot. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Save], and then press the [ ] button. Index ●● After a message is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● If the face is not recognized, you cannot register face information. 44 5 Continue registering face information. ●● To register up to 4 more points of face information (expressions or angles), repeat step 2. ●● Registered faces are more easily recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside. ●● The flash will not fire when following step 2. ●● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons ] mode. (= 35) will not be displayed in [ ●● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not filled all 5 face info slots (= 44). Shooting If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that person when shooting. ●● When you point the camera toward people, the names of up to 3 registered people will be displayed when they are detected. ●● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as the registered person if they share similar facial features. ●● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or scene differs drastically from the registered face information. ●● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces. ●● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during playback (= 88). ●● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should update their face info regularly (= 44). ●● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off]. ●● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple information display) (= 84). ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, ●● In [ but they will be recorded in still images. ●● Names recorded in continuous shooting (= 42, = 77) continue to be recorded in the same position as the first shot, even if subjects move. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Shoot. ●● Displayed names will be recorded in still images. The names of detected people (maximum total of 5) will be recorded, even if the names are not displayed. 45 Checking and Editing Registered Information 1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen. ●● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44), choose [Check/ Edit Info] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a person to check or edit their information. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the person whose information you want to check or edit, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Check or edit the information as needed. ●● To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, you can edit the name or birthday as described in step 3 of “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44). ●● To check face information, choose [Face Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button on the screen displayed, choose face information to erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in previously shot images will remain the same. Overwriting and Adding Face Information Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as their faces change quickly as they grow. You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been filled. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 1 Access the [Add Face Info] screen. P Mode ●● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44), choose [Add Face Info] and press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose a person to overwrite their face info. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name of the person whose face info you want to overwrite, and then press the [ ] button. ●● If five items of face info have already been registered, a message will be displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● If less than five items of face info are registered, go to step 4 to add face information. 46 3 Choose the face info to overwrite. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the face info to overwrite, and then press the [ ] button. Erasing Registered Information You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased. 1 Access the [Erase Info] screen. 4 Register face information. ●● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44) to shoot, and then register the new face information. ●● Registered faces are more easily recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside. ●● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the steps above to overwrite face information. ●● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (= 46), and then register new face information (= 44) as needed. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 44) and choose [Erase Info]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a person to erase their P Mode information. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name of the person to erase, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to display their name (= 86), overwrite their info (= 88), or search images for them (= 87). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● You can also erase names in image information (= 89). 47 Still Images Changing the Aspect Ratio Still Images Before Use Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) Image Customization Features Movies Basic Guide Movies Advanced Guide Choose the image’s number of recording pixels from 4 levels, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each recording pixel setting can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 171). Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● Once the setting is complete, the screen aspect ratio will be updated. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Other Shooting Modes ●● The option you configured is now displayed. P Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices. Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes. Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes. Square aspect ratio. ●● Not available in [ Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) Accessories Appendix A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) Index 3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard For e-mailing and similar purposes ] mode. ●● Not available in [ ] mode. 48 Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps Still Images Movies In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multiarea White Balance. Still Images Movies Three image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 171). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Hg Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 28). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Before Use Changing Movie Image Quality ] is Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Other Shooting Modes ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this ]. process but choose [ P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Image Quality ●● After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake. ●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● In continuous shooting (= 42), this setting is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. Number of Recording Pixels Frame Rate Details 1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD 640 x 480 30 fps For shooting in standard definition Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. ] is also available, offering smoother motion ●● In [ ] mode, [ (= 64). 49 Before Use Magnifying the Area in Focus Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway to enlarge the portion of the image in the AF frame. Displaying Grid Lines Still Images Movies Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal reference while shooting. ●● Press the [ Lines] on the [ [On] (= 28). Movies ] button, choose [Grid ] tab, and then choose Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AFPoint Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 28). Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Once the setting is complete, grid lines are displayed on the screen. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Check the focus. Setting Menu ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The face detected as the main subject is now magnified. ●● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. Accessories ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter button is pressed halfway. -- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement -- When digital zoom is used (= 37) -- When Tracking AF is used (= 74) -- When a TV is used as a display (= 142) ] mode. ●● Not available in [ Appendix Index 50 Checking for Closed Eyes Before Use Changing the IS Mode Settings Still Images Movies Still Images [ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 28). Movies Deactivating Image Stabilization Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 28). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Configure the setting. 2 Shoot. ●● [ ] flashes when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this function is only available for the final shot. ●● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 53). ●● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode (= 36). ●● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (= 42, = 77). Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], and then choose [Off] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Continuous Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 36). Accessories Off Deactivates image stabilization. Appendix Index 51 Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Recording Still Images Movies Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can reduce image stabilization. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode Settings” (= 51) to access the [IS Settings] screen. ●● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose the desired option (= 28). Before Use Customizing Camera Operation Basic Guide Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows. For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (= 28). Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing Still Images Movies Other Shooting Modes You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AFassist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 28). ●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting. ●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off] (= 51). ●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to ]. [ Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 52 Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up Still Images Before Use Changing the Image Display Style after Shots Still Images Movies You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. Movies You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Changing the Image Display Period after Shots 1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Access the [Review image after ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 28). shooting] screen. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Review image after shooting] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 28). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then choose [Off] (= 28). 2 ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Configure the setting. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Display Time]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Quick]. Accessories Appendix Index Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again. 2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec. Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again. Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway. Off No image display after shots. 53 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. 1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (= 53). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Configure the setting. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Off Displays only the image. Detailed Displays shooting details (= 160). ●● When [Display Time] (= 53) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. ] button while an image is displayed after ●● By pressing the [ shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are not changed. By pressing the [ ] button, you can do the following operations. -- Protect (= 91) -- Favorites (= 96) -- Erase (= 93) Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 54 Before Use Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control) Still Images Other Shooting Modes Basic Guide Movies Advanced Guide Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as follows. 1 Enter [ 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions Camera Basics ]. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Configure the setting. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button to access the setting screen. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a setting item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the value as you watch the screen. ●● Press the [ Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ] button. Setting Menu 3 Shoot. Brightness For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and for darker images, adjust it to the left. Color For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and for more subdued images, adjust it to the left. Tone For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right, and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left. Accessories Appendix Index 55 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot) Still Images Movies Still Images You can choose effects for images captured in [ ●● After choosing [ [ ] button. The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings. 1 Enter [ Before Use Choosing Effects Movies ] mode. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode, press the Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the effect, and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Other Shooting Modes ]. 2 Shoot. P Mode Auto All effects ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is played three times. Retro Images resemble old photos Tv, Av, and M Mode Monochrome Images are generated in one color Playback Mode ●● After the six images are displayed in succession, they are displayed simultaneously for about two seconds. Special Bold, distinctive-looking images Natural Subdued, natural-looking images Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● To keep the images displayed until you press the shutter button halfway, press the [ ] button. For full-screen display in this state, choose an image by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the original display, press the ] button. [ Accessories Appendix Index ●● Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times. ●● The six images are managed together as a group (= 87). ●● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only available immediately after you shoot. 56 Moving Subjects (Sports) Still Images Movies Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects. 1 Enter [ ]. 2 Focus. ●● While you are pressing the shutter button halfway, the camera will continue to adjust focus and image brightness where the blue frame is displayed. Basic Guide Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Before Use Specific Scenes Advanced Guide ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Camera Basics ]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a shooting mode. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (= 27). Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 3 Shoot. ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (= 69) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. ●● For details on the shooting range in [ ] mode, see “Shooting Range” (= 172). ●● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay your next shot even longer. ●● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● Continuous shooting is not available in [ ] Auto mode (= 39). Wi-Fi Functions 3 Shoot. Setting Menu Shooting Portraits (Portrait) Still Images Movies Accessories ●● Take shots of people with a softening effect. Appendix Index 57 Shooting Evening Scenes without Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene) Still Images Movies ●● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or portraits with evening scenery in the background, without the need to hold the camera very still (as with a tripod). ●● A single image is created by combining consecutive shots, reducing camera shake and image noise. ●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes. ●● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (= 69) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. ●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it steady while shooting. ●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 79). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Shooting under Low Light (Low Light) Still Images Movies ●● Shoot with minimal camera and subject shake even in low-light conditions. P Mode ●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 31). ●● [ ] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and cannot be changed. ●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions S hooting with Snowy Backgrounds (Snow) Still Images Setting Menu Movies Accessories ●● Bright, natural-colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds. Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks) Still Images Appendix Index Movies ●● Vivid shots of fireworks. 58 Image Effects (Creative Filters) ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Before Use Basic Guide Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ ]. Still Images Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. 2 Choose a shooting mode. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (= 27). 3 Advanced Guide Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) 1 Choose [ Other Shooting Modes ]. P Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 59) and choose [ ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Choose an effect level. Shoot. Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid) Still Images Movies ●● Shots in rich, vivid colors. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose an effect level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Accessories 3 Shoot. Posterized Shots (Poster Effect) Still Images Movies ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Appendix Index ●● Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration. 59 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips) Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) Speed Still Images Movies Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 59) and choose [ ]. Playback Time Approx. 12 sec. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Approx. 6 sec. Camera Basics Approx. 3 sec. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies are played back at 30 fps. Other Shooting Modes ●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the zoom before shooting. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● A white frame is displayed, indicating the image area that will not be blurred. 2 Choose the area to keep in focus. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it. 3 For movies, choose the movie playback speed. Playback Mode ●● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical or vice-versa), press the [ ] button in step 2. You can move the frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. ] and [ ] at ●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] (= 48). These quality settings cannot an aspect ratio of [ be changed. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button on the screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose the speed by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot. ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. 60 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) Still Images Still Images Movies This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. 1 Choose [ Before Use Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 59) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose a color tone. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. Standard Shots resemble toy camera images. Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. Movies This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired. 1 Choose [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 59) and choose [ ]. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose an effect level. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose an effect level (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Wi-Fi Functions Shoot. Setting Menu ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 61 Shooting in Monochrome Special Modes for Other Purposes Still Images Movies Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects (Creative Filters)” (= 59) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose a color tone. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose a color tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. B/W Black and white shots. Sepia Sepia tone shots. Blue Blue and white shots. Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) Still Images Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile) Still Images Movies Other Shooting Modes The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you pressing the shutter button. 1 Choose [ P Mode ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 57) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed. Accessories Appendix 2 Aim the camera at a person. ●● Each time the camera detects a smile, it will shoot after the lamp lights up. Index ●● To pause smile detection, press the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button again to resume detection. ●● Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected. 62 ●● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button. ●● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. ●● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down the [ ] button. Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) Still Images Movies Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 57) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. ●● Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. 4 Face the camera and wink. Before Use ●● The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame. ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately. ●● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses. ●● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink. ●● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. ●● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you press the shutter button all the way down. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face Self-Timer) Still Images Accessories Movies The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area (= 74). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots. 1 Choose [ Appendix Index ]. ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 57) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 63 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. ●● Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces. 3 Press the shutter button all the way Still Images ●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. 4 Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera. ●● After the camera detects a new face, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot. ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 51) is only available for the final shot. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you press the shutter button all the way down. Movies Basic Guide Advanced Guide Recording Movies in Standard Mode down. ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. Before Use Recording Various Movies Camera Basics Still Images 1 Enter [ Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Other Shooting Modes ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 27). P Mode ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 2 Configure the settings to suit the Wi-Fi Functions movie (= 161). Setting Menu 3 Shoot. Accessories ●● Press the movie button. ●● To stop movie recording, press the movie button again. Recording Movies with Smoother Motion Appendix Index Record movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate, as follows. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing Movie Image Quality” (= 49) and choose [ ]. 64 Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording Still Images Movies You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3stop increments within a range of –2 to +2 stops. 1 Lock the exposure. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode ●● Press the [ ] button to lock the exposure. The exposure shift bar is displayed. ●● To unlock the exposure, press the [ button again. ●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off] (= 51). ●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is set to ]. [ Still Images ] ●● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the exposure, as you watch the screen. 3 Shoot (= 64). Other Shooting Modes Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion, slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums (= 103). 1 Enter [ 2 Adjust the exposure. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies P Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Tv, Av, and M Mode ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 27). Playback Mode ●● Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Specify the shooting time and Correcting Severe Camera Shake Still Images Movies Counteract severe camera shake, as when recording movies while moving. The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and subjects are further enlarged. ●● Follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Recording” (= 52) to choose [High]. Accessories playback effect. Appendix ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time (4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons to set the playback effect, as described below. Index 3 Shoot (= 64). ●● A bar showing the elapsed time is displayed. 65 Playback Effects Before Use 2x Record a clip that is played back in fast motion. Basic Guide 1x Record a clip that is played back at normal speed. 1/2x Record a clip that is played back in slow motion. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Record a clip that is played back normally before it appears to be rewound two seconds to show a replay of the last part. During recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is added to the bar showing the elapsed time. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Sound is not recorded in these clips. ] (= 49) and cannot be changed. ●● The movie quality is [ P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Recording iFrame Movies Playback Mode Still Images Movies Wi-Fi Functions Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or devices. 1 Choose [ Setting Menu ]. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Accessories ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 27). ●● Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Appendix Index 2 Shoot (= 64). ●● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc. ] (= 49) and cannot be changed. ●● The movie quality is [ 66 Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Still Images Movies You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style. P Mode More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style 1 Enter [ Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ] mode. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Set the mode dial to [ ]. 2 Customize the settings as desired Other Shooting Modes (= 68 – = 79), and then shoot. P Mode ●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [ ] mode. ●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure ●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode (= 161). Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 69) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 77), which may enable optimum exposure. ●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the movie button. However, some FUNC. (= 27) and MENU (= 28) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 67 2 Compose the shot and shoot. Image Brightness (Exposure) Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Still Images ●● Press the [ ] button. As you watch the screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust brightness, and then press the [ ] button again when finished. ●● The correction level you specified is now displayed. ] is ●● AE: Auto Exposure ●● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial (Program Shift). Movies The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments, in a range of –2 to +2. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Changing the Metering Method Still Images P Mode Movies Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 2 7). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) Still Images Before Use ●● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ no longer displayed. Setting Menu Movies Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and exposure separately. 1 Lock the exposure. ●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is locked. Accessories Evaluative For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Center Weighted Avg. Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important. Spot Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen. Appendix Index ●● To unlock AE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 68 Changing the ISO Speed Before Use Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Movies ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. AUTO Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions. 80, 100, 200 For shooting outdoors in fair weather. 400, 800 For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight. 1600, 3200 For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. Still Images Movies Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Auto] (= 28). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ] is P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Choose a higher ISO speed for higher sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity. ●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway. ●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in some shooting conditions. ●● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy. ●● You can also correct existing images (= 99). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 69 Custom White Balance Image Colors Before Use Still Images For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) Still Images Movies Movies By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (= 70) to choose [ ]. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press ] button. the [ Other Shooting Modes ●● The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data. Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting conditions. Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight. Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting. Fluorescent For shooting under white fluorescent lighting. Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting. Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (= 70). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Setting Menu Movies Accessories Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). Appendix Index ●● The option you configured is now displayed. 70 – My Colors Off Vivid Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper. Neutral Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images. Sepia Creates sepia tone images. B/W Creates black and white images. Positive Film Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film. Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones. Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones. Vivid Blue Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid. Vivid Green Custom Color Before Use Still Images Movies Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. 1 Access the setting screen. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Follow the steps in “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 70) to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item, and then specify the value by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. P Mode Playback Mode Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and other green subjects more vivid. ●● For stronger/more intense effects (or darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/lighter effects (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left. Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid. ●● Press the [ setting. Custom Color Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other qualities as desired (= 71). ●● White balance (= 70) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes. ●● With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may change. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones. Tv, Av, and M Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ] button to complete the Accessories Appendix Index 71 Before Use Shooting in Manual Focus Mode Shooting Range and Focusing Still Images Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) Still Images Movies To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 172). Movies When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you specified. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 172). 1 Choose [ ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ]. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. ●● [ P Mode ] and the MF indicator are displayed. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 2 Specify the general focal position. ●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. ●● When the zoom position is within the range of the yellow bar below the zoom bar, [ ] turns gray and the camera cannot focus. ●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 41). (1) ●● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator (1, which shows the distance and focal position) and the magnified display, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to specify the general focal position, and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● To adjust the magnification, press the ] button. [ Appendix 3 Fine-tune the focus. Setting Menu Accessories Index ●● Press the shutter button halfway to have the camera fine-tune the focal position (Safety MF). 72 ●● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (= 73) is [Center] and AF frame size (= 73) is [Normal], and these settings cannot be changed. ●● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 37) or digital tele-converter (= 73), or when using a TV as a display (= 142), but the magnified display will not appear. ●● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it. ●● You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings. ●● To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed halfway, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Safety MF] ► [Off]. Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) Still Images Movies Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection as needed. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [MF Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 28). 2 Configure the setting. Before Use Digital Tele-Converter Still Images Movies The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or 2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 28). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor is displayed on the screen. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom ] for maximum telephoto, and when lever all the way toward [ you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 37). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Changing the AF Frame Mode Accessories Still Images Movies Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows. Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 28). ●● Choose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 28). ●● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots. 73 Center Still Images Movies One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing. ●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab to [Small] (= 28). ●● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital zoom (= 37) or digital tele-converter (= 73), and in manual focus mode (= 72). ●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock). ●● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (= 50) set to [On]. Face AiAF Still Images Movies ●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only). ●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. ●● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 75) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected: -- Subjects that are distant or extremely close -- Subjects that are dark or light -- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden ●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. ●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) Still Images Movies Playback Mode Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows. Wi-Fi Functions 1 Choose [Tracking AF]. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame Mode” (= 73) to choose [Tracking AF]. Setting Menu Accessories ●● [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. 2 Choose a subject to focus on. ●● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the desired subject, and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. ●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus. 74 ●● When the subject is detected, the camera beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the subject moves, the camera will continue to track the subject within a certain range. ●● If no subject is detected, [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button again. 3 Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ] changes to a blue [ ], which follows the subject as the camera continues to adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF) (= 75). ●● Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. ●● Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed and the camera continues to track the subject. ●● [Servo AF] (= 75) is set to [On] and cannot be changed. ●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 28) is not available. ●● [ ] is not available. Shooting with Servo AF Before Use Still Images Movies This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ AF] on the [ (= 28). Camera Basics ] button, choose [Servo ] tab, and then choose [On] Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Focus. P Mode ●● The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. ●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode. ●● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. ●● AF lock shooting is not available. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 28) is not available. ●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 41). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. ] mode (= 72), press and hold the [ ] ●● When shooting in [ button for at least one second. ●● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (= 43). However, when you choose a registered person as the subject, their name is displayed. 75 Changing the Focus Setting Before Use Shooting with the AF Lock Still Images Movies You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 28). On Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly. Still Images Movies The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Lock the focus. Camera Basics ●● With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The focus is now locked, and [ the MF indicator are displayed. Other Shooting Modes ] and ●● To unlock the focus, after you release the shutter button, press the [ ] button again and choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial). P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Compose the shot and shoot. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 76 Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in Focus Still Images Movies Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 172). 1 Configure the setting. Other Shooting Modes ●● Move the [ ] switch. 2 P Mode Configure the setting. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose a flash mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● The images are managed together as a group (= 87). ●● ●● ●● Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Raise the flash. ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● ●● Camera Basics Movies You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 171). 2 Shoot. ●● Advanced Guide Still Images ] is In [ ] mode (= 57), manual focus mode (= 72), or when AF is locked (= 76), [ ] is changed to [ ]. Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 41). Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. Continuous shooting is not available in [ ] Auto mode (= 39), even if you choose [ ]. Basic Guide Changing the Flash Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 27). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Before Use Flash Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Setting Menu ●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting. Auto Accessories Appendix Index Fires automatically in low-light conditions. On Fires for each shot. 77 Slow Synchro Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 79). ●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. Off Before Use Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation Still Images Movies Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 68), you can adjust the flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and adjust the setting by either pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial (= 27). Camera Basics ●● The correction level you specified is now displayed. Other Shooting Modes Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode P Mode For shooting without the flash. ●● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off]. ●● You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing MENU (= 28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp]. ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 28) when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately ] button. pressing the [ Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 78 Shooting with the FE Lock Before Use Other Settings Still Images Just as with the AE lock (= 68), you can lock the exposure for flash shots. 1 Raise the flash and set it to [ (= 77). Basic Guide Movies Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) ] Still Images Advanced Guide Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 171). 2 Lock the flash exposure. ●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● The flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed, the flash output level is retained. ●● To unlock FE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Compose the shot and shoot. ●● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ no longer displayed. ●● FE: Flash Exposure Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Changing the IS Mode Settings Setting Menu Still Images ] is Movies Accessories Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Deactivating Image Stabilization” (= 51) and choose [Shoot Only]. Appendix Index ●● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. ●● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording. 79 Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode) Still Images Movies Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (= 172). Tv, Av, and M Mode 1 Enter [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style Before Use Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ]. 2 Set the shutter speed. ●● Turn the [ Other Shooting Modes ] dial to set the shutter speed. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode. ●● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise. ●● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 79). ●● Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed to 1/2000 second before shooting. ●● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80] and cannot be changed. ●● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 81). ●● [ Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ]: Time value 80 Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) Still Images Movies Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value. For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (= 172). 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ ]. Still Images Basic Guide Movies Advanced Guide Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure. For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter Speed” (= 172) and “Aperture” (= 172). 1 Enter [ 2 Set the aperture value. ●● Turn the [ value. Before Use Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ ] dial to set the aperture Camera Basics Other Shooting Modes ]. P Mode 2 Configure the setting. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter speed (1) or aperture value (2), and turn the [ ] dial to specify a value. ●● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below). ●● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the diaphragm in the lens) ] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and ●● In [ set [Safety Shift] on the [ ] tab to [On] (= 28) to have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the optimum exposure. However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires. (1) (2) (3) (4) Playback Mode ●● An exposure level mark (4) based on your specified values is shown on the exposure level indicator for comparison to the optimum exposure (3). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● The exposure level mark is shown in orange when the difference from optimum exposure exceeds 2 stops. ●● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot. ●● Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ]. ●● To have the setting that is not chosen in step 2 (whether shutter speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain optimum exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the [ ] button. Note that optimum exposure may not be possible with some settings. ●● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [80] and cannot be changed. Accessories Appendix Index 81 Before Use ●● [ ]: Manual ●● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified metering method (= 68). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Adjusting the Flash Output Camera Basics Still Images Choose from the three flash levels in [ 1 Enter [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies ] mode. Other Shooting Modes ] mode. ●● Set the mode dial to [ P Mode ]. 2 Configure the setting. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and adjust the setting by either pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial (= 27). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Once the setting is complete, the flash output level is displayed. ]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]: [ Maximum ●● You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output]. ] or [ ] mode by ●● You can also set the flash level in [ accessing MENU (= 28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► [Manual]. ●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 28) when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately ] button. pressing the [ Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 82 Before Use Viewing Still Images Movies After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. Advanced Guide 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ Playback Mode Camera Basics ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Your last shot is displayed. Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways ●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ enter Playback mode. Basic Guide ] button to ●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose images. ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial clockwise. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images quickly. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through images. ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll Display mode. ●● Movies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. ] icon. 83 3 Play movies. ●● To start playback, press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button again. Before Use Switching Display Modes Still Images Movies Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (= 160). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 4 Adjust the volume. ●● Press the [ volume. ][ ●● To adjust the volume when the volume indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. (1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] buttons to adjust the Other Shooting Modes No Information Display P Mode 5 Pause playback. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To pause or resume playback, press the [ ] button. ●● After the movie is finished, [ displayed. ] is ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. ] tab ●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off]. ●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback ] tab ► [Resume] ► mode, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ [Last shot]. ●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU ] tab ► (= 28) and choose your desired effect on the [ [Transition Effect]. Playback Mode Simple Information Display Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Detailed Information Display Index 84 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) Still Images Movies ●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time Movies Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies) Before Use Basic Guide Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (= 84). Histogram Still Images ●● The graph in detailed information display (= 84) is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure. Still Images View digest movies recorded automatically in [ day of still image shooting as follows. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies ] mode (= 33) on a Other Shooting Modes 1 Choose an image. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a still image labeled with [ ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode GPS Information Display Still Images Wi-Fi Functions Movies ●● Using a smartphone connected to the camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images on the camera, adding information such as latitude, longitude, and elevation (= 129). You can review this information in the GPS information display. ●● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC (shooting date and time) are listed from top to bottom. ●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information. ●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly. 2 Play the digest movie. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). ●● The digest movie recorded automatically on the day of still image shooting is played back from the beginning. Accessories Appendix Index ●● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the camera with information display deactivated (= 84). 85 Viewing by Date Before Use Browsing and Filtering Images Digest movies can be viewed by date. 1 Choose a movie. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/ Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and then choose a date (= 28). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Navigating through Images in an Index Still Images Camera Basics Movies By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for. 2 Play the movie. ●● Press the [ 1 Display images in an index. ] button to start playback. Checking People Detected in Face ID Still Images Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 84), the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 43) will be displayed. ] button several times ●● Press the [ until simple information display is activated, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image. ●● Names will be displayed on detected people. ●● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using ] tab ► [Face ID Info] Face ID, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ► [Name Display] ► [Off]. Other Shooting Modes ●● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To display fewer images, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose an image. ●● Turn the [ images. ●● Press the [ an image. Setting Menu ] dial to scroll through the ][ Accessories ][ ][ ] buttons to choose ●● An orange frame is displayed around the selected image. ●● Press the [ ] button to view the selected image in single-image display. Appendix Index ●● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU ] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off]. (= 28) ► [ 86 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions Still Images Movies Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect (= 91) or delete (= 93) these images all at once. Displays images of a registered person (= 44). Name People Displays images with detected faces. Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 96). Still image/ Movie Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ mode (= 33). ●● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in step 2. ●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 86), “Magnifying Images” (= 89), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 90). You can also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing [Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 91) or [Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 94), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 150), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 152). ●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 97 – = 102), a message is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ] Tv, Av, and M Mode Viewing Individual Images in a Group 1 Choose a search condition. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose a condition (= 27). ●● When you have selected [ ], [ ], or [ ], choose the condition by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen displayed, and then press the [ ] button. 2 View the filtered images. ●● Images matching your conditions are displayed in yellow frames. To view only these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial. ●● To cancel filtered display, choose [ step 1. Before Use ] in Still Images Playback Mode Movies Wi-Fi Functions Images shot continuously (= 42, = 57, = 77) and images shot in [ ] mode (= 56) are grouped, and only the first image is displayed. However, you can also view the images individually. Setting Menu 1 Choose a grouped image. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image labeled with [ ]. Appendix Index 2 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). ●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some conditions, those conditions will not be available. 87 3 View images in the group individually. ●● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial will display only images in the group. ●● To cancel group playback, press the [ button, choose [ ] in the menu, and press the [ ] button again (= 27). ●● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 86) and magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 89). By choosing [Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (= 91), [Protect All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 94) or “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 150), or [All Images in Group] in “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 152), all images in the group can be manipulated at once. ●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still ] tab ► [Group Images] images, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ► [Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback. ] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying ●● In [ a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (= 56) is only shown immediately after you shoot. ] Before Use Editing Face ID Information Basic Guide If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or erase it. However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been erased. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Changing Names Other Shooting Modes 1 Access the setting screen. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (= 28). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Tv, Av, and M Mode ] Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Choose an image. Setting Menu ●● Following the procedure in “Checking People Detected in Face ID” (= 86), choose an image and press the [ ] button. ●● An orange frame is displayed around the selected face. When multiple names are displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the name to change, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index 88 3 Choose the editing option. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Image Viewing Options Basic Guide Advanced Guide Magnifying Images Still Images 4 Choose the name of the person to overwrite with. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Magnify an image. ●● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding Face Information” (= 46) to choose the name of the person you want to overwrite with. Erasing Names ●● On the screen displayed in step 3 in “Changing Names” (= 88), choose [Erase] and press the [ ] button. ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics Movies (1) ●● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will zoom in and magnify the image. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever. Other Shooting Modes ●● The approximate position of the displayed area (1) is shown for reference. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To zoom out, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it. Playback Mode P Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Move the display position and Setting Menu switch images as needed. ●● To move the display position, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Accessories ●● To switch to other images while zoomed, turn the [ ] dial. Appendix Index ●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by ] button. pressing the [ 89 Changing Slideshow Settings Viewing Slideshows Still Images Movies Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each image is displayed for about three seconds. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 27). ●● The slideshow will start after [Loading image] is displayed for a few seconds. ●● Press the [ slideshow. ] button to stop the ●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 25) are deactivated during slideshows. You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions between images and the display duration of each image. 1 Access the setting screen. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Configure the settings. ●● Choose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 28). Other Shooting Modes ●● To start the slideshow with your settings, choose [Start] and press the [ ] button. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button. ●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fastrewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down. ●● In filtered display (= 87), only images matching search conditions are played. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 90 Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Still Images Movies Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes. Still Images Movies Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (= 93). Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). [Protected] is displayed. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● To cancel protection, repeat this process ] again, and then press and choose [ the [ ] button. 1 Choose Smart Shuffle. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). ●● Four candidate images are displayed. Before Use Protecting Images Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card (= 136). Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the image you want to view next. ●● Your chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. ●● For full-screen display of the center image, press the [ ] button. To restore the original display, press the [ ] button again. ] button to restore ●● Press the [ single-image display. Playback Mode ●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Using the Menu Accessories 1 Appendix Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Protect] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Index ●● Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases: -- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera -- An unsupported image is currently displayed -- Images are shown in filtered display (= 87) -- During group playback (= 87) 91 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Choose an option as desired (= 28). ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ Before Use Selecting a Range Basic Guide 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 91), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. Choosing Images Individually Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a starting image. ●● Press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 91), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. 3 Protect the image. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories 3 Choose an ending image. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last image], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images before the first image cannot be selected as the last image. 92 4 Protect the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Erasing Images Still Images Movies Advanced Guide You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 91) cannot be erased. ●● You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed. ●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4. Protecting All Images at Once 1 Choose [Protect All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 91), choose [Protect All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Protect the images. Basic Guide Camera Basics 1 Choose an image to erase. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] Other Shooting Modes 2 Erase the image. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The current image is now erased. Setting Menu ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index Clearing All Protection at Once You can clear protection from all images at once. To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2. 93 2 Choose an image. Erasing Multiple Images at Once ●● Once you choose an image following step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually” (= 92), [ ] is displayed. You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 91) cannot be erased. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Choosing a Selection Method Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. 1 Access the setting screen. 3 ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Erase the images. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Choose an option as desired (= 28). ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Selecting a Range Wi-Fi Functions 1 Choose [Select Range]. Setting Menu ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 94), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. Choosing Images Individually 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 94), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. Accessories 2 Choose images. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 92) to specify images. Appendix Index 3 Erase the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. 94 Specifying All Images at Once 1 Choose [Select All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 94), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Before Use Rotating Images Still Images Movies Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. 1 Choose [ Erase the images. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Rotate the image. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending on the desired direction. Each time you press the button, the image is rotated 90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the setting. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Using the Menu Accessories 1 Appendix Choose [Rotate]. ●● Press the [ [Rotate] on the [ ] button and choose ] tab (= 28). Index 95 2 Rotate the image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. ] ●● The image is rotated 90° each time you press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ ●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 96). Still Images Movies You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● “Viewing” (= 83), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 90), “Protecting Images” (= 91), “Erasing Images” (= 93), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 150), “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 152) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 27). Deactivating Auto Rotation P Mode ●● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed. Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates images based on the current camera orientation. ●● Press the [ Rotate] on the [ [Off] (= 28). Before Use Tagging Images as Favorites Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To untag the image, repeat this process and choose [ ] again, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ] button, choose [Auto ] tab, and then choose Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix ●● Images cannot be rotated (= 95) when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation. ●● In Smart Shuffle (= 91) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. Index 96 Using the Menu Before Use Editing Still Images 1 Choose [Favorites]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Favorites] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Image editing (= 97 – = 100) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Resizing Images 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To untag the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Still Images Other Shooting Modes Movies P Mode Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels. 1 Choose [Resize]. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Resize] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Playback Mode ●● Repeat this process to choose additional images. 3 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose an image. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an image size. Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the size, and then press the [ ] button. ●● [Save new image?] is displayed. ●● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when creating albums (= 103). ) ●● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7. (Does not apply to movies.) 97 4 Save the new image. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The image is now saved as a new file. 5 Review the new image. ●● Press the [ ] button. [Display new image?] is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. (1) (2) (3) 3 Adjust the cropping area. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● A frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped (1). Camera Basics ●● The original image is shown in the upper left, and a preview of the image as cropped (2) is shown in the lower right. You can also see the number of recording pixels after cropping (3). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting of [ ] (= 48). ●● To change the frame orientation, press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels. ●● Faces detected in the image are enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left image. Turn the [ ] dial to switch frames, which position the cropping area. ●● The saved image is now displayed. ●● Press the [ 4 Cropping Still Images Movies You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ] button. Accessories Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 97). Appendix Index ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting of [ ] (= 48) or resized to [ ] (= 97). ●● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. ●● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than uncropped images. ●● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 43), only the names of the people left in the cropped image will remain. 98 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images ●● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (= 70). Movies You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 70). 1 Choose [My Colors]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab (= 28). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 97). ●● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color. ●● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Before Use Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file. 1 Other Shooting Modes P Mode Choose [i-Contrast]. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose an image. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 97). 99 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. ●● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. ●● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using [Low], [Medium], or [High]. Basic Guide ●● The image is now saved as a new file. Advanced Guide ●● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 97). Correcting Red-Eye Still Images Before Use ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. Movies Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Some images may not be corrected accurately. ●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. ●● Protected images cannot be overwritten. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file. Tv, Av, and M Mode 1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ tab (= 28). ] Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Accessories ] 3 Correct the image. ●● Press the [ Appendix Index ] button. ●● Red-eye detected by the camera is now corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas. ●● Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (= 89). 100 3 Review the edited movie. Editing Movies Still Images Movies You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies (excluding digest movies, = 33). 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” (= 83), choose [ ] and press the [ button. ] ●● The movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed. (1) 2 Specify portions to cut. ●● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is the editing bar. ●● Press the [ or [ ]. (2) ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] ●● To view the portions you can cut (identified by [ ] on the screen), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of the movie by choosing [ ]. ●● If you move [ ] to a position other than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut. Before Use ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. The edited movie is now played. Basic Guide ●● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. Advanced Guide ] ●● To cancel editing, press the [ button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 4 Save the edited movie. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● The movie is now saved as a new file. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix ●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. ●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be available. ●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress. ●● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 141). Index 101 Reducing File Sizes Before Use Editing Digest Movies Still Images Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows. ●● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format. ] movies cannot be compressed. ●● [ ●● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose [Overwrite]. Movies Individual chapters (clips) (= 33) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Select the clip to erase. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)” (= 83) to play a movie created in [ ] mode, and then press the [ ] button to access the movie control panel. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose [ Playback Mode ]. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories ●● The selected clip is played back repeatedly. 3 Confirm erasure. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● The clip is erased, and the short movie is overwritten. ●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer. 102 Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) Still Images Movies You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie of about 2 – 3 minutes. Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged. Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and ensure at least 1 GB of free space. Choosing Themes for Albums Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (= 96) to albums. Date Creates an album of images shot on the same day. Images are selected from those shot on the same day as the image displayed before you access the home screen. Person’s name Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as albums of children as they grow up. Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before shooting may be selected for albums. Images selected are those that have the same subject shot during the same month as the image displayed before you access the home screen. Event A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other events. Images are selected from those shot during the event before and after the image displayed before you access the home screen. Custom Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or people registered in Face ID. 1 Choose an image. ●● Choose an image in single-image display. ●● Themes available in step 3 will vary depending on image shooting date and Face ID information. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Access the home screen. ●● Press the [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. ●● After [Busy] is displayed, the home screen is displayed. Other Shooting Modes 3 Preview an album. P Mode ●● Choose a person, [Date], or [Event] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) as the album theme, and then press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● After [Loading] is displayed for a few seconds, the album is played. Wi-Fi Functions 4 Save the album. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Save Album as Movie], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the album is saved, [Saved] is displayed. Accessories Appendix Index 5 Play the album (= 83). 103 ●● Albums can include following images captured by the camera. -- Still images -- Digest movies (= 33) -- Short clips with a playback time of two seconds or more (= 65) ●● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the memory card. ●● You can specify a color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button. ●● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed album, and press the [ ] button again. Adding Background Music to Albums Still Images Movies Choose from three kinds of background music to play during album playback. 1 Register background music to a memory card. ●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103), choose [Music Settings] and press the [ ] button. ●● The screen at left is displayed when you use a new or recently formatted memory card. Choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), press the [ ] button, and wait about a minute and a half until the three types of music are registered to the card. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● When using a memory card with music already registered to it, go to step 2. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Create the album. Other Shooting Modes ●● Follow steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103) to create an album. P Mode 3 Configure background music settings. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the desired item, and then adjust the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 4 Save the album. Accessories ●● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103) to save albums. ●● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or changed. ●● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited (= 102). Appendix Index 104 ●● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No] on the screen in step 3. ●● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3. ●● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track], choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ] button. 4 Choose background music. ●● When the screen at left is displayed, choose [Music Settings]. Add background music as described in “Adding Background Music to Albums” (= 104), and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 5 Choose a color effect. Creating Your Own Albums Still Images Movies Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color effect, and then press the [ ] button. Create your own albums by choosing desired images. 1 Choose to create a Custom album. ●● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103), choose [Custom] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose a selection method. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103), choose [Change Color Effect]. ] 3 Choose album elements. ●● Once you select the elements for your album and press the [ ] button, your selected elements are labeled with [ ]. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 6 Save the album. Playback Mode ●● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 103) to save albums. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Up to 40 images can be selected if you choose [Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album, [Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The previous images are labeled with [ ], and multiple images are displayed at once. ●● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection]. ●● The color effect may not be applied to some images. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ] button after you ●● Press the [ are finished selecting still images, digest movies, and short clips in [Image Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or people in [Person Selection]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Preview], and then press the [ ] button. 105 Available Wi-Fi Features You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi Functions Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web services Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Smartphones and Tablets Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Computer Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via Wi-Fi. P Mode ●● Web Services Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Printers Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting DPS over IP) to print them. Setting Menu Accessories ●● Another Camera Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras. Appendix Index 106 Sending Images to a Smartphone There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send images. ●● Connect via NFC (= 107) Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later) against the camera to connect the devices. ●● Connect to a device assigned to the [ ] button (= 109) Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies sending images to a smartphone (= 109). Note that only one smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button. ●● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (= 110) You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added. Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon website. ●● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera users who connect their camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi should consider switching from the CameraWindow mobile app to the Camera Connect mobile app. Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera. Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on the camera mode when the devices are touched together. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched together, you can choose and send images on the image selection screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots (= 129). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched together, you can choose and send images from the index display shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically after image transfer. Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 1 Install Camera Connect. ●● Activate NFC on the smartphone and touch the devices N-Mark ( ) together to start Google Play on the smartphone automatically. Once the Camera Connect download page is displayed, download and install the app. Accessories Appendix Index 107 2 Establish the connection. ●● Make sure the camera is off or in Shooting mode. ●● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone with Camera Connect installed against the camera’s N-Mark. ●● The camera starts up automatically. ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Camera Connect is started on the smartphone. ●● The devices are connected automatically. 3 Adjust the privacy setting. ●● After this screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now use the smartphone to browse, import, or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely. 4 Send an image. ●● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. Camera Basics ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ] ●● To end the connection, press the [ button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind. -- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This may damage the devices. -- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices together in slightly different positions. If connection is not established, keep the devices together until the camera screen is updated. -- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices together again. -- Do not place other objects between the camera and smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or similar accessories may block communication. ●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 3. ●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera (= 130). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 108 ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step 2 (= 131). ●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 124). ●● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off]. Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ●● Press the [ on. ] button to turn the camera ●● Touch the smartphone with Camera Connect installed (= 107) against the camera’s N-Mark ( ). ●● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Sending Images to an NFCCompatible Smartphone” (= 107) to enter it. ●● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect to via NFC in Playback mode. ●● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (= 124). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 1 Install Camera Connect. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● For Android smartphones, find Camera Connect in Google Play and download and install the app. 2 Press the [ Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories ] button. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The images are now sent. The connection is ended automatically after image transfer. Advanced Guide Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ] button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for viewing and saving camera images on your connected device. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 112). ●● For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera Connect in the App Store and download and install the app. ●● After you finish choosing images, press ] button. the [ Basic Guide Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● Repeat this process to choose additional images. Before Use Appendix Index ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 109 3 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. 4 Connect the smartphone to the network. ●● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. 5 Start Camera Connect. ●● Start Camera Connect on the smartphone. ●● After the camera recognizes the smartphone, a device selection screen is displayed. 6 Choose the smartphone to connect to. ●● Choose the smartphone (either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● After a connection is established with the smartphone, the smartphone name is displayed on the camera. (This screen will close in about one minute.) 7 Import images. ●● Use the smartphone to import images from the camera to the smartphone. ●● Use the smartphone to end the connection; the camera will automatically turn off. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step 2 (= 131). ●● For better security, you can display a password on the screen in step 3 by accessing MENU (= 28) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password displayed on the camera. ●● One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign a different one, first clear the current one in MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button]. ●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu Accessories These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 112). 1 Install Camera Connect. Appendix Index ●● For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera Connect in the App Store and download and install the app. ●● For Android smartphones, find Camera Connect in Google Play and download and install the app. 110 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera ] button. ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, choose [OK] (= 109). 3 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose [Add a Device]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. ●● Choose the smartphone to connect to, as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 109). 5 Adjust the privacy setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now use the smartphone to browse, import, or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 6 Send an image. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● To end the connection, press the [ ] button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection. ●● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the above procedure starting from step 1. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 5. ●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera (= 130). 111 ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 124). 4 Connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. ●● For WPS-compatible access points, connect to the access point and choose the smartphone as described in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● For non-WPS access points, follow steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 117) to connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 5 Configure the privacy settings and Using Another Access Point When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point. 1 Prepare for the connection. ●● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 109) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 110). 2 Connect the smartphone to the access point. 3 Choose [Switch Network]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Switch Network], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode send images. ●● Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 110) to configure the privacy settings and send images. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Previous Access Points Setting Menu To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 109) or step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 110). ●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Camera Access Point Mode]. Accessories Appendix Index ●● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 112). ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 112) from step 4. ●● A list of detected access points will be displayed. 112 Saving Images to a Computer Preparing to Register a Computer Checking Your Computer Environment The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. ●● Windows 8/8.1 ●● Windows 7 SP1 ●● Mac OS X 10.9 ●● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later ●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported. ●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version) require a separate download and installation of Windows Media Feature Pack. For details, check the following website. http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730 Installing the Software Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. 1 Download the software. ●● With a computer connected to the Internet, access http://www.canon.com/icpd/. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Access the site for your country or region. ●● Download the software. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Install the files. Other Shooting Modes ●● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. P Mode ●● Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance and the Internet connection. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately. Setting Menu Accessories ●● To uninstall the software, follow these steps. -- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation. -- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications] folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the Trash, and then empty the Trash. Appendix Index 113 Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only) On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly. 1 Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point. ●● For instructions on checking your network connection, refer to the computer user manual. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Click in the following order: [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection setup]. ●● In the application that opens, follow the on-screen instructions and configure the setting. ●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step 2. -- Turn on media streaming. This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi. -- Turn on network discovery. This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera. -- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). This allows you to check the network connection status. -- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP). This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically. ●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here. Check the settings of your security software. Saving Images to a Connected Computer Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows. Also refer to the access point user manual. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Confirming Access Point Compatibility Camera Basics Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi standards in “Wi-Fi” (= 170). Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 115) or not (= 117). For non-WPS access points, check the following information. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Network name (SSID/ESSID) The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the “access point name” or “network name”. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method / encryption mode) The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system authentication), or no security. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Password (encryption key / network key) The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”. ●● Key index (transmit key) The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data encryption. Use “1” as the setting. Accessories Appendix Index ●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings, contact the system administrator for details. ●● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings. 114 ●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on checking settings, refer to the access point user manual. ●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”. ●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”. ●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address]. 3 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Camera Basics Choose [Add a Device]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Using WPS-Compatible Access Points WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for settings on a WPS supported device. 1 Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point. ●● For instructions on checking the connection, refer to the device and access point user manuals. 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera Tv, Av, and M Mode 5 Choose [WPS Connection]. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [WPS Connection], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 6 Choose [PBC Method]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [PBC Method], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ] button. ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 7 Establish the connection. ●● On the access point, hold down the WPS connection button for a few seconds. 115 ●● On the camera, press the [ go to the next step. ] button to ●● The camera connects to the access point and lists devices connected to it on the [Select a Device] screen. 8 Choose the target device. ●● Choose the target device name (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. 9 Install a driver (first Windows connection only). ●● When this screen is displayed on the camera, click the Start menu on the computer, click [Control Panel], and then click [Add a device]. 10 Display CameraWindow. ●● Windows: Access CameraWindow by clicking [Downloads Images From Canon Camera]. ●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is established between the camera and computer. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 11 Import images. ●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. Other Shooting Modes ●● Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed after image import is complete. Playback Mode ●● To view images you save to a computer, use preinstalled or commonly available software compatible with images captured by the camera. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix ●● Double-click the connected camera icon. ●● Driver installation will begin. ●● After driver installation is complete, and the camera and computer connection is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be displayed. Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen. Index 116 ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step 2 (= 131). ●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen is blank. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera. ●● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included with your access point. Connecting to Listed Access Points 1 View the listed access points. ●● View the listed networks (access points) as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115). 2 Choose an access point. 3 Enter the access point password. ●● Press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter the password (= 29). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Next], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 4 Choose [Auto]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Auto], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● To save images to a connected computer, follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115). Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or refer to the user manual. ●● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password. ●● When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a network (access point), and then press the [ ] button. 117 Previous Access Points You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115). ●● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115). ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115) from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 117) from step 2. Sending Images to a Registered Web Service Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Registering Web Services Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you want to use. Other Shooting Modes ●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services. P Mode ●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and version information. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon. com/cig/). Wi-Fi Functions ●● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you want to register. Setting Menu Accessories ●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable. Appendix Index 118 4 Choose [ Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. 1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and access the camera link settings page. ●● From a computer or smartphone, access http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. ●● Once the login screen is displayed, enter your user name and password to log in. If you do not have a CANON iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow the instructions to complete member registration (free of charge). 2 Choose the type of camera. ●● On this camera model, [ in the Wi-Fi menu. ] is displayed ], a page is ●● Once you choose [ displayed for entering the authentication code. On this page in step 7, you will enter the authentication code displayed on the camera after steps 3 – 6. 3 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 5 Camera Basics Choose [Authenticate]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Authenticate], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 6 Establish a connection with an access point. Playback Mode ●● Connect to the access point as described in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 115) or in steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 117). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Once the camera is connected to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, an authentication code is displayed. ●● Keep this screen displayed until you are finished with step 7. Accessories Appendix Index ] button. ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 7 Enter the authentication code. ●● On the smartphone or computer, enter the authentication code displayed on the camera and go to the next step. ●● A six-digit confirmation number is displayed. 119 8 Check the confirmation number and complete the setup process. ●● Check the confirmation number on the second screen in step 6 (displayed after you pressed the [ ][ ] buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then pressed the [ ] button). ●● Make sure the confirmation number on the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Complete the setup process on the smartphone or computer. ●● [ ] (= 127) and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY are now added as destinations, and the [ ] icon changes to [ ]. ●● A message is displayed on the smartphone or computer to indicate that this process is finished. You can add other Web services, as needed. In this case, follow the instructions from step 2 in “Registering Other Web Services” (= 120). Registering Other Web Services Before Use You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the camera first (= 119). 1 Access the Web service settings Basic Guide Advanced Guide screen. Camera Basics ●● Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 119) to log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then access the Web service settings screen. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Configure the Web service you want P Mode to use. ●● Follow the instructions displayed on the smartphone or computer to set up the Web service. 3 Choose [ Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ]. ●● In Playback mode, press the [ to access the Wi-Fi menu. Wi-Fi Functions ] button Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● The Web service settings are now updated. Appendix Index ●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the camera settings. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step 3 (= 131). ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then configure the setting. 120 Uploading Images to Web Services 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ 2 ] button to turn the camera ] button. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and add comments before sending (= 124). ●● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app. Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Choose the destination. ●● Choose the icon of the Web service to connect to (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● If multiple recipients or sharing options are used with a Web service, choose the desired item on the [Select Recipient] screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 3 Send an image. Setting Menu ●● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When uploading to YouTube, read the terms of service, choose [I Agree], and press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. ●● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed. Press the [ ] button to return to the playback screen. 121 Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 112). 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 110). 2 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose [Add a Device]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Connect the printer to the network. ●● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 5 Choose the printer. Camera Basics ●● Choose the printer name (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 6 Choose an image to print. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. ●● Press the [ Tv, Av, and M Mode ] Playback Mode ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● For detailed printing instructions, see “Printing Images” (= 146). ●● To end the connection, press the [ ] button, choose [OK] on the confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. 122 ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 112). Sending Images to Another Camera Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 110). 2 Choose [ Other Shooting Modes P Mode ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Choose [Add a Device]. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera too. Appendix Index ●● Camera connection information will be added when [Start connection on target camera] is displayed on both camera screens. 123 4 Send an image. ●● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send this image], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. ●● To end the connection, press the ] button, choose [OK] on the [ confirmation screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 28) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 124). Before Use Image Sending Options Basic Guide You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to annotate the images you send. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Sending Multiple Images Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Choose [Select and send]. Other Shooting Modes ●● On the image transfer screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose a selection method. Wi-Fi Functions ] Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Choosing Images Individually Index 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple Images” (= 124), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 124 2 Choose images. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● To choose additional images, repeat this step from the beginning. ●● After you finish choosing images, press ] button. the [ 3 Send the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. 3 Send the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Sending Favorite Images Camera Basics Send only images tagged as favorites (= 96). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Choose [Favorite Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple Images” (= 124), choose [Favorite Images] and press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● An image selection screen for favorites is displayed. If you prefer not to include an image, choose the image and press the [ ] button to remove [ ]. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● After you finish choosing images, press ] button. the [ Wi-Fi Functions 2 Send the images. Selecting a Range 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple Images” (= 124), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have tagged images as favorites. Accessories Appendix Index 2 Choose images. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 92) to specify images. ●● To include movies, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl. Movies], and then press the [ ] button to mark the option as selected ( ). ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 125 Notes on Sending Images ●● Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (= 4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers. ●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level. ●● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you can send. ●● For movies that you do not compress (= 102), a separate, compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough space for it on the memory card. ●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. ●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons. [ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak ●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) Before Use On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. Advanced Guide Basic Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option. ●● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size before sending. ●● Movies cannot be resized. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 28) ► [ ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending]. ] tab Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Adding Comments Wi-Fi Functions Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service. 1 Setting Menu Accessories Access the screen for adding comments. ●● On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 2 Add a comment (= 29). 3 Send the image. ●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent. ●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The same comment is added to all images sent together. 126 Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services. Initial Preparations 3 Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only when sending images by pressing the [ ] button). ●● Clear the [ ] button setting if a smartphone is already assigned to the button (= 109). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button to access the mobile connection screen, choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Preparing the Computer Preparing the Camera Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button, so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. 1 Add [ ] as a destination. ●● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 119). ●● To include a Web service as the destination, log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 118), select your camera model, access the Web service settings screen, and choose the destination Web service in Image Sync settings. For details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help. 2 Choose the type of images to send (only when sending movies with images). P Mode Install and configure the software on the destination computer. 1 Install the software. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Install the software on a computer connected to the Internet (= 113). Playback Mode 2 Register the camera. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ and then click [Add new camera]. ●● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ then click [Add new camera]. ], Setting Menu Accessories ], and ●● A list of cameras linked to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose the camera from which images are to be sent. Appendix Index ●● Once the camera is registered and the computer is ready to receive images, the icon changes to [ ]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 28). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Stills/Movies]. 127 Sending Images Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer. If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and save the images. 1 Send images. ●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer. ●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet. ●● If you have already assigned [ ] to the [ ] button, press the [ ] button. Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone ●● If you have not assigned the button this way, choose [ ] as described in steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web Services” (= 121). By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows. ●● Sent images are labeled with a [ ] icon. 2 Save the images to the computer. ●● Images are automatically saved to the computer when you turn it on. ●● Images are automatically sent to Web services from the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, even if the computer is off. ●● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 141). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing the Computer” (= 127). Playback Mode ●● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 119), select your camera model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help. ●● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be viewed. ●● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon Online Photo Album Help. 128 Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera Connect. ●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone ●● Geotag images on the camera (= 129) ●● Shoot remotely (= 129) ●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image viewing on the smartphone (= 109, = 110, = 130). Geotagging Images on the Camera GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation. ●● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (= 134) to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones. ●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing these images with others, as when posting images online where many others can view them. Before Use Shooting Remotely Basic Guide As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to shoot remotely. 1 Advanced Guide Choose a shooting mode. ●● Turn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ [ ], or [ ] as the mode. Camera Basics ], Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Secure the camera. Other Shooting Modes ●● Once remote shooting begins, the camera lens will come out. Lens motion from zooming may also move the camera out of position. Keep the camera still by mounting it on a tripod or taking other measures. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 3 Connect the camera and smartphone (= 109, = 110). Wi-Fi Functions ●● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes]. Setting Menu 4 Choose remote shooting. Accessories ●● In Camera Connect on the smartphone, choose remote shooting. ●● The camera lens will come out. Do not press near the lens, and make sure no objects will obstruct it. Appendix Index ●● Once the camera is ready for remote shooting, a live image from the camera will be displayed on the smartphone. ●● At this time, a message is displayed on the camera, and all operations except pressing the power button are disabled. 5 Shoot. ●● Use the smartphone to shoot. 129 ●● [ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ], ], and [ ]. However, some FUNC. and MENU settings you [ have configured in advance may be changed automatically. ●● Movie shooting is not available. Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings Before Use Basic Guide Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows. Advanced Guide Editing Connection Information ●● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the connection environment will not affect recorded images. ●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the smartphone to browse and import images from the camera. Camera Basics 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode a device to edit. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 2 Choose [Edit a Device]. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories 3 Choose the device to edit. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 4 Choose the item to edit. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the item to edit, and then press the [ ] button. ●● The items you can change depend on the device or service. 130 Changing the Camera Nickname Connection Configurable Items Web Services [Change Device Nickname] (= 131) O O O O – [View Settings] (= 109) – O – – – [Erase Connection Info] (= 131) O O O O – O : Configurable Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as desired. 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode – : Not configurable Changing a Device Nickname You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on the camera. ●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 130), choose [Change Device Nickname] and press the [ ] button. ●● Select the input field and press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname (= 29). Erasing Connection Information 2 Other Shooting Modes Choose [Change Device Nickname]. ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 3 Change the nickname. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ] button to access the keyboard (= 29), and then enter a nickname. Accessories Appendix Erase connection information (information about devices that you have connected to) as follows. ●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 130), choose [Erase Connection Info] and press the [ ] button. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Change Device Nickname], and then press the [ ] button (= 28). ●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different nickname. ●● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname] screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter a new nickname. Index ●● The connection information will be erased. 131 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera to another person, or dispose of it. Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 28). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 2 Choose [Reset Settings]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 3 Restore the default settings. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset. ●● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] on the [ ] tab (= 139). Appendix Index 132 Before Use Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Basic Guide Basic camera functions are configured on the [ ] tab of the MENU (= 28). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience. Setting Menu Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience Advanced Guide Camera Basics Silencing Camera Operations Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. Other Shooting Modes ●● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On]. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button as you turn the camera on. ●● Sound is not played during movies (= 83) if you mute camera sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button. Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Adjusting the Volume Index Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. ●● Choose [Volume], and then press the [ button. ] ●● Choose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume. 133 Before Use Hiding Hints and Tips World Clock Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 27) or MENU (= 28) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). ●● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off]. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Specify your destination. Other Shooting Modes ●● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the [ ] button. Date and Time ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. Adjust the date and time as follows. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the destination. ●● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then adjust the setting, either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Press the [ Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories ] button. 2 Switch to the destination time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 159). ●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 19) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date. 134 Lens Retraction Timing Power-Saving Adjustment The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the [ ] button in Shooting mode (= 24). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.]. Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 25). ●● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then choose [0 sec.]. ●● Choose [Power Saving], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● After choosing an item, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust it as needed. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. Tv, Av, and M Mode Using Eco Mode Playback Mode This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Configure the setting. ●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. ●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode (= 135) to [On]. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On]. Accessories ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 159). Appendix ●● The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity. Index 2 Shoot. ●● To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway. 135 Before Use Screen Brightness Formatting Memory Cards Adjust screen brightness as follows. Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera. Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. ●● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the brightness. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Access the [Format] screen. ●● Choose [Format], and then press the [ button. ●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original ] button again for at least brightness, press and hold the [ one second or restart the camera. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose [OK]. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 3 Format the memory card. Hiding the Start-Up Screen If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally shown when you turn the camera on. ●● Choose [Start-up Image], and then choose [Off]. Wi-Fi Functions ●● To begin the formatting process, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When formatting is finished, [Memory card formatting complete] is displayed. Press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. ●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity. 136 Low-Level Formatting Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers. ●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 136), because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. ●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Choose [File Numbering], and then choose an option. ●● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 136), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Low Level Format], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is displayed. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 136) to continue with the formatting process. Before Use File Numbering Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Continuous Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards. Tv, Av, and M Mode Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted, = 136) memory card. Date-Based Image Storage Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. ●● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose [Daily]. ●● Images will now be saved in folders created on the shooting date. 137 Before Use Metric / Non-Metric Display Display Language Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 31), the MF indicator (= 72), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed. Change the display language as needed. ●● Choose [Language the [ ] button. ●● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in]. Basic Guide ], and then press Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Checking Certification Logos Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body. ●● Choose [Certification Logo Display], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing ] button. the [ P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ Wi-Fi Functions ] tab. Setting Menu ●● [Video System] (= 143) ●● [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 106) Accessories ●● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (= 109) Appendix Index 138 Restoring Default Camera Settings If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings. 1 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Access the [Reset All] screen. Camera Basics ●● Choose [Reset All], and then press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Restore default settings. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode ●● Default settings are now restored. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● The following functions are not restored to default settings. -- Information registered using Face ID (= 43) -- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 134), [Time Zone] (= 134), ] (= 138), and [Video System] (= 143) [Language -- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 70) ] (= 57) and [ ] (= 59) -- Shooting mode chosen in [ modes -- Movie mode (= 64) -- Wi-Fi settings (= 106) Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 139 Before Use System Map Basic Guide Included Accessories Accessories Wrist Strap Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately Advanced Guide Battery Pack NB-6LH*1 Camera Basics Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*1 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2 P Mode Memory Card Card Reader Tv, Av, and M Mode Computer Playback Mode PictBridge-Compatible Printers Power Wi-Fi Functions HDMI Cable (camera end: Type D)*3 Setting Menu Cables Accessories AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST Appendix TV/Video System Index *1 Also available for purchase separately. *2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU). *3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.). 140 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. Optional Accessories The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Power Supplies Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Battery Pack NB-6LH Other Shooting Modes ●● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery P Mode Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH Playback Mode ●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack. ●● Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 ●● For powering the camera using household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera. Appendix Index 141 ●● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). ●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Before Use Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Basic Guide Advanced Guide Playback on a TV Camera Basics Other Accessories Still Images Interface Cable IFC-400PCU ●● For connecting the camera to a computer or printer. Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST ●● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen. Printers Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the display (= 160). Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Playback on a High-Definition TV Still Images Movies Wi-Fi Functions You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image quality of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high definition. Setting Menu Accessories 1 Make sure the camera and TV are Appendix off. Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers ●● Even without using a computer, you can print images by connecting the camera directly to a printer. For details, visit your nearest Canon retailer. 2 Connect the camera to the TV. Index ●● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into the HDMI input as shown. 142 ●● On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. Playback on a Standard-Definition TV Still Images Before Use Movies Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Make sure the camera and TV are Camera Basics off. 3 Turn the TV on and switch to external input. ●● Switch the TV input to the external input you connected the cable to in step 2. 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ on. ] button to turn the camera ●● Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Connect the camera to the TV. ●● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the video inputs as shown. Other Shooting Modes ●● Make sure the cable plugs are in video inputs of the same color. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● When finished, turn off the camera and TV before disconnecting the cable. ●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an HDTV. Setting Menu Accessories 3 Display images. ●● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a High-Definition TV” (= 142) to display images. Appendix Index ●● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the ] button and choose video output format, press the [ [Video System] on the [ ] tab. 143 ●● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (= 50), MF-Point Zoom (= 72) and MF Peaking (= 73) are not available. Powering the Camera with Household Power Still Images Movies Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. 4 Connect the power cord. ●● Insert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet. ●● Turn the camera on and use it as desired. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● When finished, turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. ●● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. Other Shooting Modes P Mode 1 Make sure the camera is off. 2 Insert the coupler. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode ●● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 17) to open the cover. (1) Wi-Fi Functions ●● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1) facing as shown, insert the coupler just as you would a battery pack (following step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 17)). ●● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 17) to close the cover. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 3 Connect the adapter to the coupler. ●● Open the cover and insert the adapter plug fully into the coupler. 144 Using the Software To utilize the features of the following software, download the software from the Canon website and install it on your computer. Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B), you can connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer. 1 ●● CameraWindow -- Import images to your computer (2) ●● Image Transfer Utility -- Set up Image Sync (= 127) and receive images ●● Map Utility -- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images ●● To view and edit images on a computer, use preinstalled or commonly available software compatible with images captured by the camera. Computer Connections via a Cable Checking Your Computer Environment Before Use Saving Images to a Computer (1) Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Turn the camera on to access CameraWindow. ●● Press the [ Setting Menu ] button to turn the camera on. ●● Windows: Follow the steps introduced below. ●● Mac OS X 10.8 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. ●● Windows 8/8.1 When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (= 113). Camera Basics ●● With the camera turned off, open the cover (1). With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal (2). ●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer. ●● Mac OS X 10.9 Advanced Guide Connect the camera to the computer. The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. ●● Windows 7 SP1 Basic Guide Accessories Appendix Index ●● In the screen that is displayed, click the change program link of [ ]. ●● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon Camera] and then click [OK]. Installing the Software For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (= 113). 145 ●● Double-click [ ]. Before Use Printing Images Still Images 3 Save the images to the computer. ●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. ●● Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. Movies Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. ●● After images are saved, close ] button to CameraWindow, press the [ turn the camera off, and unplug the cable. Easy Print ●● To view images you save to a computer, use preinstalled or commonly available software compatible with images captured by the camera. Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B). ●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply. -- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. -- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. -- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. -- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Still Images Movies Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode 1 Make sure the camera and printer Wi-Fi Functions are off. 2 Connect the camera to the printer. Setting Menu ●● Open the terminal cover. Holding the smaller cable plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal. Accessories ●● Connect the larger cable plug to the printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual. Appendix Index 146 3 Turn the printer on. 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ on. Still Images ] button to turn the camera Movies 1 Access the printing screen. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 146) to access this screen. 5 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an image. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then choose an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ], and Default 7 Print the image. Date File No. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. Both ●● Printing now begins. Off Other Shooting Modes P Mode Matches current printer settings. Tv, Av, and M Mode Prints images with the date added. Prints images with the file number added. Playback Mode Prints images with both the date and file number added. Wi-Fi Functions – ●● To print other images, repeat the above procedures starting from step 5 after printing is finished. Default Off – ●● When you are finished printing, turn the camera and printer off and disconnect the cable. On Uses information from the time of shooting to print under optimal settings. ●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see “Printers” (= 142). Camera Basics 2 Configure the settings. ] 6 Access the printing screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ press the [ ] button again. Before Use Configuring Print Settings Setting Menu Matches current printer settings. Accessories Appendix Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye. No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print. Cropping – Specify a desired image area to print (= 148). Paper Settings – Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (= 148). Index 147 Cropping Images before Printing Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing Still Images Movies By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 147) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the [ ] button. Still Images Before Use Movies 1 Choose [Paper Settings]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 147) to access the printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a paper size. ●● A cropping frame is now displayed, indicating the image area to print. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. Playback Mode ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ●● To rotate the frame, press the [ button. ●● When finished, press the [ 3 Choose a type of paper. ] ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories 3 Print the image. ●● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 146) to print. ●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. Appendix 4 Choose a layout. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ dial to choose an option. Index ] ●● When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of images per sheet. ●● Press the [ ] button. 5 Print the image. 148 Available Layout Options Before Use Printing Movie Scenes Default Matches current printer settings. Bordered Prints with blank space around the image. Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet. ID Photo Prints images for identification purposes. Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L and an aspect ratio of 4:3. Fixed Size Choose the print size. Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. Still Images Movies 1 Access the printing screen. length. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose the printing area. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing method. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode 3 Print the image. 1 Choose [ID Photo]. 2 Choose the long and short side Camera Basics 2 Choose a printing method. Movies ●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing” (= 148), choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button. Advanced Guide ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 146) to choose a movie. The screen at left is displayed. Printing ID Photos Still Images Basic Guide Playback Mode Movie Printing Options Single Wi-Fi Functions Prints the current scene as a still image. Setting Menu Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file Sequence number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. ●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before Printing” (= 148) to choose the printing area. 4 Print the image. 149 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies Batch printing (= 151) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. Configuring Print Settings Still Images Movies Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab. Choose and configure items as desired (= 28). ●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File No.] at the same time. ●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately). ●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/ Time] on the [ ] tab (= 19). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Setting Up Printing for Individual Images Still Images Playback Mode Movies Wi-Fi Functions 1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. Standard Print Type Date File No. Clear DPOF data One image is printed per sheet. Index Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet. Both Both standard and index formats are printed. On Images are printed with the shooting date. Off – On Images are printed with the file number. Off – On All image print list settings are cleared after printing. Off – Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● You can now specify the number of copies. ●● If you specify index printing for the image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 150 3 Specify the number of prints. Clearing All Images from the Print List ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to specify the number of prints (up to 99). ●● To set up printing for other images and specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 – 3. ●● Printing quantity cannot be specified for index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2. ●● When finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. ] button Before Use ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 150), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Movies ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 150), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 92) to specify images. ●● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image. Movies Camera Basics Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) ●● When images have been added to the print list (= 150 – = 151), this screen is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the [ ] button to print the images in the print list. Still Images Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Still Images Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images Basic Guide P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Order], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Setting Up Printing for All Images Still Images Movies Index ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 150), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 151 2 Choose an image. Adding Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer. Before Use ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. Basic Guide ●● [ Advanced Guide ] is displayed. ●● To remove the image from the photobook, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. Choosing a Selection Method ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and then choose how you will select images. ●● When finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. Adding Images Individually Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 152), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. P Mode Adding All Images to a Photobook Tv, Av, and M Mode Still Images ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. Other Shooting Modes ] button Movies Playback Mode ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 152), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Removing All Images from a Photobook Still Images Movies Index ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 152), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 152 Troubleshooting If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Appendix Helpful information when using the camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Power Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. ●● ●● ●● ●● Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 17). Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 17). Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 17). Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode The battery pack runs out of power quickly. ●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects. ●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. ●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu The lens is not retracted. Accessories ●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 17). Appendix The battery pack is swollen. ●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Index Display on a TV Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 142). 153 Shooting Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 31). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 68). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 68, = 68). Reduce the lighting on subjects. ●● In Playback mode (= 83), press the shutter button halfway (= 25). ●● ●● ●● ●● Strange display on the screen under low light (= 26). Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 34). Cannot shoot. Strange display on the screen when shooting. ●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies. -- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting. Full-screen display is not available while shooting (= 48). [ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is not possible (= 34). [ ●● ●● ●● ●● ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 34). Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 79). Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 77). Increase the ISO speed (= 69). Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 79). Shots are out of focus. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes White spots appear in flash shots. Tv, Av, and M Mode Shots look grainy. Playback Mode P Mode ●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. ●● Lower the ISO speed (= 69). ●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 57). Wi-Fi Functions Subjects are affected by red-eye. Setting Menu ●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 53). The red-eye reduction lamp (= 4) will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. ●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 100). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 77). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 68). Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 69, = 99). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 68, = 68). Camera Basics ●● Shoot within flash range (= 171). ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 31). ●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (= 78, = 82). No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ●● ●● ●● ●● Advanced Guide Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower. Subjects in shots look too dark. Basic Guide ●● Shoot within flash range (= 171). ●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (= 78, = 82). ●● Increase the ISO speed (= 69). ●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot (= 25). ●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 172). ●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 52). ●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. ●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 74, = 76). ●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. Before Use ●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 137). Accessories Appendix Index ●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 161 – = 167). The Babies or Children icon does not display. ●● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face information (= 43). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday, re-register face information (= 44), or make sure that the date/time are set correctly (= 134). 154 Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ button. Shooting Movies The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. ●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 136, = 171). [ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically. ●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. -- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 137). -- Lower the image quality (= 49). -- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 171). Zooming is not possible. ●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] ●● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the camera from the printer. ●● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi connection. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story Highlights home screen. Camera Basics ●● In simple information display mode (= 84), choose an image that shows the name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home screen (= 103). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Memory Card P Mode ] mode (= 60). The memory card is not recognized. ●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 24). Tv, Av, and M Mode Subjects look distorted. ●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a malfunction. Playback Playback is not possible. ●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure. Playback stops, or audio skips. ●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (= 137). ●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds. ●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate. Sound is not played during movies. ●● Adjust the volume (= 133) if you have activated [Mute] (= 133) or the sound in the movie is faint. ●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] mode (= 60) because audio is not recorded in this mode. Computer Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Cannot transfer images to a computer. ●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows. ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button -- Press the [ down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Wi-Fi Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button. Index ●● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try again. ●● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback. ●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer, computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable. 155 Cannot add a device/destination. ●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/destinations (= 130). ●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 118). ●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on your smartphone (= 109). ●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer. Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 113, = 114). ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else. ●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 132). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Cannot connect to the access point. ●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera (= 170). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a supported channel manually. Tv, Av, and M Mode Cannot send images. Playback Mode ●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on the destination device and resend the images. ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. ●● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent using Image Sync via an access point (= 127). Before moving or renaming these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Cannot resize images for sending. ●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their original size. ●● Movies cannot be resized. Index Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted. ●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce sending time (= 126). ●● Movies may take a long time to send. ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz ] is displayed. band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. 156 On-Screen Messages If an error message is displayed, respond as follows. Shooting or Playback No memory card ●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way (= 17). Memory card locked ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (= 17). Cannot record! ●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a memory card facing the correct way (= 17). Memory card error (= 137) ●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 17), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Insufficient space on card ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 31, = 55, = 67, = 80) or edit images (= 97). Either erase unneeded images (= 93) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 17). Charge the battery (= 17) No Image. ●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. Protected! (= 91) Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back MOV/Cannot play back MP4 ●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. ●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/ Unselectable image./No identification information ●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies. Edit ID Info* (= 88), Magnify* (= 89), Smart Shuffle* (= 91), Rotate* (= 95), Favorites (= 96), Edit* (= 97), Print List* (= 150), and Photobook Set-up* (= 152). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Invalid selection range ●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 92, = 94, = 151), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. Other Shooting Modes Exceeded selection limit ●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 150) or Photobook Set-up (= 152). Choose 998 images or less. ●● Print List (= 150) or Photobook Set-up (= 152) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. ●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 91), Erase (= 93), Favorites (= 96), Print List (= 150), or Photobook Set-up (= 152). P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Naming error! ●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 137), or format the memory card (= 136). Setting Menu Accessories Lens Error ●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Appendix Index A camera error was detected (error number) ●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 157 File Error ●● Correct printing (= 146) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is connected to the printer. Print error ●● Check the paper size setting (= 148). If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. Ink absorber full ●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement. Wi-Fi Connection failed Sending failed Memory card error ●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Receiving failed Insufficient space on card Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card with sufficient space. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Receiving failed Memory card locked Other Shooting Modes ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 114). ●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the connection. ●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection. Receiving failed Naming error! ●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received. Playback Mode Cannot determine access point Insufficient space on server Wi-Fi Functions ●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try reconnecting again. No access points found ●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on. ●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the correct SSID. Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings ●● Check the access point security settings (= 114). ●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space. ●● Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 127) to your computer. Setting Menu Accessories Check network settings ●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current network settings. Appendix Index IP address conflict ●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another. Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed ●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed. ●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. ●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors. 158 (20) AF frame (= 73), Spot AE point frame (= 68) On-Screen Information (21) AE lock (= 68), FE lock (= 79) Shooting (Information Display) (22) Shutter speed (= 80, = 81) (23) Aperture value (= 81, = 81) (28) (11)(12)(13) (14)(15) (27) (18) (19) (2) (3) ( ) (5) 4 (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (29) (26) Grid lines (= 50) * In [ (20) (30) (31) (32) Before Use (28) Zoom bar (= 31) (29) Auto (= 39) (30) Wind filter (= 34) (31) Time zone (= 134) Basic Guide Advanced Guide (32) Image stabilization (= 79) Camera Basics (33) MF indicator (= 72) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (34) Exposure compensation level (= 68) Other Shooting Modes ] mode, indicates the number of shots available. P Mode Battery Level Tv, Av, and M Mode An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Display Details Playback Mode Sufficient charge (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (34) (1) (25) ISO speed (= 69) (16) (17) (1) (24) Exposure level (= 81) (27) Hybrid Auto mode (= 33) (33) Shooting mode (= 161), Scene icon (= 35) (11) IS mode icon (= 36) (10) Camera shake warning (= 34) (2) Flash mode (= 77) (12) Battery level (= 159) (3) Flash exposure compensation / Flash output level (= 78, = 82) (13) Still image compression (= 79), Recording pixel setting (= 48) (4) Metering method (= 68) (5) Eco mode (= 135) (Blinking red) [Charge the battery] Slightly depleted, but sufficient Wi-Fi Functions Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon Setting Menu Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately Accessories Appendix Index (14) Recordable shots (= 171)* (15) Movie quality (= 49) (16) Remaining time (= 171) (6) Drive mode (= 77) (7) Mercury lamp correction (= 49), White balance (= 70) (8) My Colors (= 70) (18) Focus range (= 72, = 72), AF lock (= 76) (9) Self-timer (= 41) (19) Blink detection (= 51) (17) Zoom magnification (= 37), Digital tele-converter (= 73) 159 (27) Compression (image quality) (= 79) / Recording pixel setting (= 48, = 49), Digest movies (= 33), MP4 (movies), Albums (= 103) Playback (Detailed Information Display) (2) (3) (4) (5)(6)(7)(8)(9) (10) (11) (1) (12) (13) (14) (17) (18) (19) (20) (23) (25) (27) (24) (15) (16) (28) Still images: Recording pixel setting (= 171) Movies: Playback time (= 171) Before Use Basic Guide (29) File size Advanced Guide ●● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the display (= 142). Camera Basics (21) (22) (28) (29) (26) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Summary of Movie Control Panel Other Shooting Modes The following operations are available on the movie control panel, accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 83). P Mode Play (1) Movies (= 31, = 83) (2) Tv, Av, and M Mode Current image no. / Total no. of images (15) Exposure compensation level (= 68) Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.) (16) ISO speed (= 69) Playback Mode (3) Histogram (= 85) (17) Metering method (= 68) Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 102) (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Wi-Fi Functions (4) Battery level (= 159) (5) Wi-Fi signal strength (= 126) (18) Flash (= 77), Flash exposure compensation (= 78) Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ button.) Setting Menu (6) Image Sync (= 127) (19) White balance (= 70) (7) Image editing (= 97), Movie compression (= 102) (20) Mercury lamp correction (= 49), Creative Shot effect (= 56) (8) Favorites (= 96) (21) My Colors (= 70, = 99) (9) Protection (= 91) (22) Focus range (= 72, = 72) Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, = 102) (23) Red-eye correction (= 100), Short clip playback effect (= 65) Edit (= 101) (10) Folder number - File number (= 137) (11) Shooting date/time (= 19) (12) Shooting mode (= 161) (13) Shutter speed (= 80, = 81) (14) Aperture value (= 81, = 81) (24) i-Contrast (= 69) (25) Image quality / Frame rate (movies) (= 48, = 49) (26) Group playback (= 87) Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] Accessories ] button.) Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 102) (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Appendix Index Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer (= 146). * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. ●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 160 Before Use Functions and Menu Tables Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or automatically set in that shooting mode. Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that shooting mode. Exposure Compensation (= 68) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *3 / / / / / / / / / *3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics / / Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode / Other Shooting Modes / / / / / P Mode / Tv, Av, and M Mode / / / / / Playback Mode / / / / / Wi-Fi Functions / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Setting Menu / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Accessories / / / AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (= 65)* / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Appendix / 2 Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Focus Range (= 72, = 72, = 76) / / / / / / / / / Flash (= 77) / / / / / Shots*2 / / / / / / AE Lock/FE Lock (= 68, = 79)*4 Delay*1 / / *3 / / / Program Shift (= 68) Self-Timer Settings (= 42) / / / / / / Shutter Speed (= 81) / / / Aperture Value (= 81) Self-Timer (= 41) / / / Advanced Guide Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 161 White Balance (= 70) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tracking AF Subject Selection (= 74) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Change Display (= 26) / / Before Use / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics / Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ISO Speed (= 69) AUTO *1 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. *2 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots. *3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases. *4 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode. FUNC. Menu / / Other Shooting Modes / / / / / / / / / / / / / / P Mode 80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tv, Av, and M Mode / / / / / Playback Mode Flash Exposure Compensation (= 78) / / Metering Method (= 68) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Wi-Fi Functions / Setting Menu Flash Output Level (= 82) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Accessories / Appendix Drive Mode (= 77) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / My Colors (= 70) / / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *2 / / / / Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 162 Movie Quality (= 49) *3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 48) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *4 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Before Use / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *4 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics / Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode / / / Other Shooting Modes / / P Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *4 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Recording Pixels (= 48) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *4 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tv, Av, and M Mode / Playback Mode *1 White balance is not available. *2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. ], AF lock, or [ ]. *3 [ ] is set with [ *4 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 60). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Shooting Tab Accessories / Appendix AF Frame (= 73) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Face AiAF* / / Compression (= 79) 1 / / Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tracking AF / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Center / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 163 AF Frame Size (= 73)*2 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Digital Zoom (= 37) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1.6x/2.0x / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / * / / / / / / / / / / / / Continuous AF (= 76) Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics / Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Other Shooting Modes / AF-assist Beam (= 52) P Mode / / Tv, Av, and M Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Playback Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Wi-Fi Functions / Setting Menu Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / Accessories / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Appendix / 2x/4x Servo AF (= 75) Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Safety MF (= 72) On / / / / MF-Point Zoom (= 72) On / / / / Off AF-Point Zoom (= 50) / / / / On Off / / / / Off Standard / / / / 3 On Small / / Before Use Off Normal On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 164 Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / MF Peaking Settings (= 73) / / On/Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Auto / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide / / / / / / / / / / / / / Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Other Shooting Modes P Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Wi-Fi Functions / Setting Menu / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Accessories / Appendix Hg Lamp Corr. (= 49) On/Off Manual / / Index / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Safety Shift (= 81) Red-Eye Lamp On On/Off / / / / Off Flash Mode / / / Auto / / Flash Settings (= 53, = 78, = 82) / / / / i-Contrast (= 69) Red/Blue/Yellow / / / Off / / Color / / / / Safety FE / / Low/High / / / On / Level / / / / Flash Output Peaking / / Before Use Flash Exp. Comp / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 165 Grid Lines (= 50) Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Wind Filter (= 34) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off/Quick / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode / Other Shooting Modes / / / / / / / / / / / / / / P Mode / Tv, Av, and M Mode / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Playback Mode / Wi-Fi Functions Low / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Detailed / / Setting Menu / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Accessories Standard / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Blink Detection (= 51) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Appendix / Index High On / / / / / / Display Area (= 38) Large/Medium/Small Off / / / / / Dynamic IS Off / / / / / Shoot Only Display Info / / / / Continuous 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold / / / / IS Mode / / Display Time / / / / Off Review image after shooting (= 53) / / / IS Settings (= 79) Auto/Off / / Before Use On/Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 166 Auto Settings (= 39, = 40) Before Use Set Up Tab Seek Assist Basic Guide On Item Reference Page Mute = 133 Volume = 133 Hints & Tips = 134 Date/Time = 134 Auto Zoom Time Zone = 134 Face/Upper Body/Whole Body/Manual/Auto Lens Retraction = 135 Eco Mode = 135 Power Saving = 25, = 135 LCD Brightness = 136 Start-up Image = 136 Format = 136 File Numbering = 137 Create Folder = 137 Units = 138 Video System = 143 Wi-Fi Settings = 106 Mobile Device Connect Button = 109 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Digest Type (= 33) Include Stills/No Stills / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Face ID Settings (= 44) On/Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode. *2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center]. ] mode. *3 [On] when subject movement is detected in [ / Certification Logo Display = 138 Language = 138 Reset All = 139 Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index - When using Face ID (= 43) in some modes or with some settings, names of people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed. 167 Playback Tab Before Use Print Tab Basic Guide Item Reference Page Item Reference Page Album Playback = 103 Print – List/Play Digest Movies = 86 Select Images & Qty. = 150 Slideshow = 90 Select Range = 151 Erase = 93 Select All Images = 151 Protect = 91 Clear All Selections = 151 Rotate = 95 Print Settings = 150 Favorites = 96 Photobook Set-up = 152 i-Contrast = 99 Red-Eye Correction = 100 Cropping = 98 Resize = 97 My Colors = 99 Face ID Info = 86 Transition Effect = 83 Index Effect = 86 Scroll Display = 83 Group Images = 87 Auto Rotate = 96 Resume = 83 Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 168 Handling Precautions ●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact. ●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or erase image data. ●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. ●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen. ●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. ●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use. ●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until it runs out of power before storing the battery pack. Specifications Camera Specifications Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Camera Effective Pixels (Max.) Approx. 20.3 million pixels Lens Focal Length 30x zoom: 4.5 (W) – 135.0 (T) mm (35mm film equivalent: 25 (W) – 750 (T) mm) LCD Monitor 3.0-type color TFT LCD Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots P Mode File Format Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) compliant Tv, Av, and M Mode Data Type Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)) Interface Hi-speed USB HDMI output Analog audio output (stereo) Analog video output (NTSC/PAL) Power Source Battery Pack NB-6LH AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 Dimensions (Based on CIPA Guidelines) 112.7 x 65.8 x 34.8 mm (4.44 x 2.59 x 1.37 in.) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Approx. 269 g (approx. 9.49 oz.; including the Weight (Based on battery pack and memory card) CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 245 g (approx. 8.64 oz.; camera body only) 169 Wi-Fi Standards Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time IEEE 802.11b/g/n* * 2.4 GHz band only Transmission Methods OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n) DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) Communication Modes Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2 *1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup *2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS Supported Channels 1 ‒ 11 Security WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) Digital Zoom [Standard] 25 – 3000 mm (Represents the combined focal length of optical and digital zoom.) Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 40.0 ‒ 1200 mm Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 50.0 ‒ 1500 mm Before Use Number of Shots Approx. 230 Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 315 Movie Recording Time*1 Approx. 45 minutes Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting*2) Approx. 1 hour, 15 minutes Camera Basics Approx. 4 hours Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Time* 3 Basic Guide Advanced Guide *1 Time under these conditions. - [ ] mode ] - Quality: [ - With repeated recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off *2 Time under these conditions. - [ ] mode ] - Quality: [ - Without zooming or other operations - Recording is resumed immediately after stopping automatically at a file size of 4 GB or a time of about 29:59 *3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Setting Menu ●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above. Accessories ●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack. Appendix Index 170 Number of Shots per Memory Card Recording Time per Memory Card The number of shots at an aspect ratio (= 48) of 4:3 per memory card is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect ratio. Number of Recording Pixels Compression Ratio Number of Shots per Memory Card (Approx. shots) 16 GB (Large) 20M/ 5184x3888 1680 (Medium 1) 10M/ 3648x2736 3217 (Medium 2) 3M/2048x1536 (Small) 0.3M/640x480 Recording Time per Memory Card Image Quality Before Use Basic Guide 16 GB Advanced Guide 59 min. 30 sec. 1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec.* Camera Basics 4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec. 2729 5061 9344 16755 53992 80988 ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. * 52 min. 12 sec. for iFrame movies (= 66). Other Shooting Modes ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. P Mode ●● Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately seconds when shooting in [ 1 hour when shooting in [ ]. Playback Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 10 or higher memory cards are recommended. Setting Menu Flash Range Accessories Maximum wide angle ( Maximum telephoto ( ) ) 50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.) 1.4 – 2.0 m (4.6 – 6.6 ft.) Appendix Index 171 Shooting Range Shooting Mode Other modes Focus Range Shutter Speed Maximum Wide Angle ( ) Maximum Telephoto ( ) – 1 cm (0.4 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity – 1.0 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 8.0 m (26 ft.) – infinity 5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity * * 1 – 50 cm (0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.) 1 – 1/3200 sec. Available values in [ ] mode (sec.) 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity Aperture * Not available in some shooting modes. f/number Available values in [ ] mode* Continuous Shooting Speed Continuous Shooting Mode [ ] mode, automatically set range – 1 cm (0.4 in.) – infinity Before Use Speed P Mode f/3.2 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.9 – f/8.0 (T) Tv, Av, and M Mode F3.2, F3.5, F4.0, F4.5, F5.0, F5.6, F6.3, F6.9, F7.1, F8.0 Playback Mode * Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available. Wi-Fi Functions Approx. 6.0 shots/sec. Setting Menu Approx. 4.5 shots/sec. Approx. 4.5 shots/sec. Accessories ●● Speed when using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specified in Canon testing standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors. Appendix Index 172 Battery Pack NB-6LH Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Nominal Voltage: 3.7 V DC Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V) Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH) Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (twoindicator system) Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 173 Exposure AE lock 68 Compensation 68 FE lock 79 Index A AC adapter kit 141, 144 Accessories 141 AE lock 68 AF frames 73 AF lock 76 Aspect ratio 48 AUTO mode (shooting mode) 21, 31 Av (shooting mode) 81 AV cable 143 B Batteries → Date/time (date/time battery) Battery charger 2, 141 Battery pack Charging 17 Eco mode 135 Level 159 Power saving 25 Black and white images 71 Blink detection 51 C Camera Reset all 139 Camera access point mode 112 Camera Connect 107 CameraWindow 145 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 118 Center (AF frame mode) 74 Clock 30 Color (white balance) 70 Compression ratio (image quality) 79 Connecting via an access point 114 Continuous shooting 36, 42 Creative filters (shooting mode) 59 Creative shot 56 Cropping 98, 148 Custom white balance 70 D Date/time Changing 19 Date/time battery 20 Settings 19 World clock 134 DC coupler 144 Defaults → Reset all Digital tele-converter 73 Digital zoom 37 Display language 20 DPOF 150 E Eco mode 135 Editing Cropping 98 i-Contrast 99 My Colors 99 Red-eye correction 100 Resizing images 97 Editing or erasing connection information 130 Erasing 93 Error messages 157 F Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 74 Face ID 43 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 63 Favorites 96 FE lock 79 File numbering 137 Fireworks (shooting mode) 58 Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 59 Flash Deactivating flash 78 Flash exposure compensation 78 On 77 Slow synchro 78 Focusing AF frames 73 AF lock 76 AF-point zoom 50 MF peaking 73 Servo AF 75 Focus lock 74 Focus range Macro 72 Manual focus 72 Framing assist 38 FUNC. menu Basic operations 27 Table 162 G Geotagging images 129 GPS information display 85 Grid lines 50 H Handheld nightscene (shooting mode) 58 HDMI cable 142 Household power 144 Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 33 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics I Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode i-Contrast 69, 99 iFrame movies (movie mode) 66 Image quality → Compression ratio (image quality) Images Display period 53 Erasing 93 Playback → Viewing Protecting 91 Image stabilization 79 Image Sync 127 Indicator 30, 52, 53 ISO speed 69 Other Shooting Modes P Mode Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu L Accessories Live View Control (shooting mode) 55 Low light (shooting mode) 58 M M (shooting mode) 81 Macro (focus range) 72 Magnified display 89 Manual focus (focus range) 72 Memory cards 2 Recording time 171 Menu Basic operations 28 Table 161 Mercury lamp correction 49 Appendix Index 174 Metering method 68 Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60 Mobile device connection button 109 Monochrome (shooting mode) 62 Movies Editing 101 Image quality (recording pixels/ frame rate) 48, 49 Recording time 171 Multi-area White Balance 49 My Colors 70, 99 P P (shooting mode) 67 Package contents 2 Photobook set-up 152 PictBridge 142, 146 Playback → Viewing Portrait (shooting mode) 57 Poster effect (shooting mode) 59 Power 141 → AC adapter kit → Battery charger → Battery pack Power saving 25 Printing 146 Program AE 67 Protecting 91 R Recording pixels (image size) 48 Red-eye correction 100 Remote shooting 129 Reset all 139 Resizing images 97 Rotating 95 S Saving images to a computer 145 Screen Display language 20 Icons 159, 160 Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu Searching 87 Self-timer 41 2-second self-timer 41 Customizing the self-timer 42 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 63 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 63 Sending images 123 Sending images to another camera 123 Sending images to a smartphone 107 Sending images to Web services 118 Sepia tone images 71 Servo AF 75 Shooting Shooting date/time → Date/time Shooting information 159 Short clips (movie mode) 65 Slideshow 90 Smart Shuffle 91 Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 62 Smile (shooting mode) 62 Snow (shooting mode) 58 Soft focus (shooting mode) 61 Software Installation 113, 145 Saving images to a computer 145 Sounds 133 Standard (movie mode) 64 Stereo AV cable 142, 143 Story Highlights 103 Strap 2, 16 Super vivid (shooting mode) 59 Before Use T Advanced Guide Basic Guide Terminal 143, 146 Toy camera effect (shooting mode) 61 Tracking AF 74 Traveling with the camera 134 Troubleshooting 153 TV display 142 Tv (shooting mode) 80 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode V Tv, Av, and M Mode Viewing 22 Image search 87 Index display 86 Magnified display 89 Single-image display 22 Slideshow 90 Smart Shuffle 91 TV display 142 Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories W White balance (color) 70 Wi-Fi functions 106 Wi-Fi menu 110 Wind filter 34 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 63 World clock 134 Wrist strap → Strap Appendix Index Z Zoom 21, 32, 37 175 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ●● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use -- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where use is allowed. Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from use in other countries and regions. ●● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties: -- Altering or modifying the product -- Removing the certification labels from the product ●● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or services (including this product) outside Japan. ●● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo. ●● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use. The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content. ●● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary. ●● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide. Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in this guide. ●● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical equipment or other electronic equipment. Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Radio Wave Interference Precautions Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time as this product. Tv, Av, and M Mode Playback Mode Security Precautions Wi-Fi Functions Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required. Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi. ●● Only use networks you are authorized to use. This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or theft of the product. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product due to loss or theft of the product. 176 If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur. ●● Transmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending. ●● Unauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems). To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly secure your Wi-Fi network. Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings. The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP enables PictBridge connections in network environments, and the camera is also compatible with this standard. Trademarks and Licensing Before Use ●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Basic Guide ●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Advanced Guide ●● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc. Camera Basics ●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC. ●● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc. Other Shooting Modes ●● Wi-Fi , Wi-Fi Alliance , WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. P Mode ●● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Tv, Av, and M Mode ●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Playback Mode ® ® ●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. Wi-Fi Functions ●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard. Disclaimer Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited. ●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards. ●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product specifications and appearance. ●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. ●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss arising from the use of this product. 177-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
Canon PowerShot SX710 HS Handleiding
- Categorie
- Lcd-tv's
- Type
- Handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Canon PowerShot SX710 HS User manual
Gerelateerde papieren
Andere documenten
-
Sony Cyber-Shot DSC W630 Handleiding
-
Sony DSC-H90 Handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
Minox DC 1222 Gebruikershandleiding
-
-
-
Samsung Digimax 130 Handleiding